Casio Digital Camera EX S880 User Manual

E
Digital Camera  
EX-S880  
User’s Guide  
Thank you for purchasing this CASIO product.  
• Before using it, be sure to read the precautions  
contained in this User’s Guide.  
• Keep the User’s Guide in a safe place for future  
reference.  
• For the most up-to-date information about this  
product, visit the official EXILIM  
Website at http://www.exilim.com/  
K838PCM1DMX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
Configuring Display Language, Date,  
and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
CONTENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Shooting a Snapshot while Shooting  
a Movie (Snapshot-In-Movie) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Reducing the Effects of Hand and Subject  
Recording with Normal-speed Continuous Shutter,  
and Flash Continuous Shutter  
Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Shooting Images of Business Cards  
and Documents (Business Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Recording Snapshots into a Multi-image  
Layout (Layout Shots). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Auto Tracking a Moving Subject  
(Auto Framing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
82  
Performing a face recognition recording  
Using the Family First Mode to Give Priority  
CONTENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Using Key Customize to Assign Functions  
Displaying the Image You Just Recorded  
Using Mode Memory to Configure Power On  
Reducing the Effects of Overexposure and  
Underexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Using the On-screen Histogram to  
Resetting the Camera to Its Initial Factory  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS  
Check Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
CONTENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Using Color Restoration to Correct  
Combining Multiple Snapshots into  
Adjusting White Balance of  
a Recorded Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Creating a Snapshot of a Movie Frame  
(MOTION PRINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
CONTENTS  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
USING THE CAMERA WITH A  
Specifying the File Name Serial Number  
Generation Rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Transfer of Images from the Camera and  
Transfer of Images from the Camera and  
Using DPOF to Specify Images to be  
Printed and the Number of Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
CONTENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
QUICK START BASICS  
First, charge the battery  
(page 36)  
3. Close the battery cover.  
Loading the Battery into the Camera  
1. Open the battery cover.  
While pressing lightly on  
the cover, slide it in the  
direction indicated by the  
arrow to open.  
2. Load the battery into the camera.  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
   
Using the USB Cradle to Charge  
1. Plug the USB cradle into a household power  
outlet.  
AC adaptor  
AC power cord  
2. Place the camera onto the USB cradle.  
[CHARGE] lamp  
Red: Charging  
Green: Charged (Full)  
It takes about two hours to  
achieve a full charge.  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Configuring Display Language, Date, and Time Settings  
1. Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the camera.  
[ON/OFF] (Power)  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the  
language you want and then press [SET].  
3. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the area  
where you will use the camera and then press  
[SET].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the city where you  
will use the camera and then press [SET].  
SET  
[BS]  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select the summer time  
(DST) setting you want and then press [SET].  
The settings on this page are required the first time you turn on  
the camera after purchasing it.  
If you make a mistake when configuring the language, date,  
and time settings, you can change the settings (pages 202,  
206).  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
   
6. Use [S] and [T] to select the date format and then press [SET].  
Example: December 19, 2007  
To display the date like this:  
Select this option:  
YY/MM/DD  
07/12/19  
19/12/07  
12/19/07  
DD/MM/YY  
MM/DD/YY  
7. Set the date and the time.  
Use [W] and [X] to select the setting you want (year, month, day, hour, minute) and then use [S] and [T] to change the setting.  
To switch between 12-hour and 24-hour format, press [BS].  
8. When settings are completed, press [SET].  
9. Press [ON/OFF] to turn off the camera.  
After finishing this procedure, advance to the procedure on the next page.  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Using a Memory Card  
(page 46)  
2. Load a memory card into the camera.  
Loading a Memory Card into the Camera  
When a memory card is loaded, the camera stores images you  
shoot on the card.  
MEMORY  
CARD  
NOTE  
Y
R
EMO  
M
CARD  
Though the camera has built-in memory, using a memory  
card provides additional capacity you can use to store more  
images, high-quality and large-size images, and longer  
movies.  
The camera will store images in its built-in memory if there  
is no memory card loaded. If you prefer to use built-in  
memory, skip this procedure and go to “Shooting a  
Snapshot” on page 15.  
Front  
Back  
With the front of the memory card facing upwards (towards  
the monitor screen side of the camera), slide it into the card  
slot and press until it clicks securely into place.  
3. Close the battery cover.  
For information about memory card capacity, see page  
1. Open the battery cover.  
While pressing lightly on the  
cover, slide it in the direction  
indicated by the arrow to open.  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
 
5. Press [S] to select “Format” and then press  
Formatting a Memory Card  
Before you can use a memory card with your camera, you must  
[SET].  
To cancel formatting, select “Cancel” and then press  
format it.  
[SET].  
IMPORTANT!  
Wait until the “Busy... Please wait...” message disappears  
from the monitor screen before doing anything else.  
Formatting a memory card that already has snapshots or  
other files on it, will delete its contents. Normally you do not  
need to format a memory card again. However, if storing to  
a card has slowed down or if you notice any other  
abnormality, re-format the card.  
“Set Up” Tab  
Be sure to perform the following procedure on the camera  
to format the memory card.  
[ON/OFF] (Power)  
1. Press [ON/OFF] to turn on the camera.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the “Set Up” tab.  
4. Use [T] to select “Format” and then press [X].  
[MENU]  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
 
Shooting a Snapshot  
(page 62)  
1. Press [  
] to turn on the camera.  
This enters the REC mode and displays “  
Auto icon  
” (Auto icon)  
Operation Lamp  
] (REC)  
on the monitor screen.  
2. Point the camera at the subject.  
[
3. While taking care to keep the camera still, half-  
press the shutter button.  
Shutter Button  
When the image is in focus, the camera will beep, the  
operation lamp will light green, and the focus frame will turn  
green.  
4. Continuing to keep the camera still, press the  
shutter button all the way down.  
Focus Frame  
The recorded image will remain on the display for about one  
second, and then it will be stored in memory. After that, the  
camera will be ready to shoot the next image.  
Monitor Screen  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
 
Snapshot Image Size and Image Quality  
Your camera lets you select from among various image size  
and quality settings. Note that image size and quality  
settings affect how many images can be stored in memory.  
You can change the image size and quality settings as  
required to shoot a smaller or lower-resolution image for  
attachment to an e-mail message, for publishing on a  
website, etc. You can also select an image size that suits  
the size of paper you plan to use for printing your images.  
For details, see pages 66, 68, and 287.  
How do I half-press the shutter button?  
The shutter button is designed to stop about half way down  
when you press it lightly. Stopping at this point is called a  
“half-press”. When you half-press the shutter button, the  
camera automatically adjusts exposure and focuses on the  
subject it is currently pointed at.  
Mastering how much pressure is required for a half-press  
and a full-press of the shutter button is an important  
technique for good-looking images.  
Half-press  
Full-press  
Press lightly  
until the  
button stops.  
All the way  
Beep-beep!  
Click!  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Viewing Snapshots  
Fully pressing the shutter button without  
waiting for Auto Focus  
Fully pressing the shutter button without waiting for Auto  
Focus to operate will record using Quick Shutter (page 128).  
Quick Shutter lets you capture exactly the moment you want.  
[
] (PLAY)  
With Quick Shutter, the camera uses high-speed Auto  
Focus, which means you can capture quick moving action  
more easily. Note, however, that some images may be out  
of focus when Quick Shutter is used.  
Whenever possible, take a little extra time to half-press  
the shutter button in order to ensure proper focus.  
[W][X]  
1. Press [  
] to enter the PLAY mode.  
If there are multiple images in memory, use [W] and [X] to  
scroll through them.  
To return to the REC mode  
Press [  
].  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
 
Shooting a Movie  
(page 94)  
3. Press [  
] again to stop recording.  
Movie Icon  
Remaining Recording Time  
Movie Image Quality  
Your camera lets you select from among six image quality  
settings (UHQ, UHQ Wide, HQ, HQ Wide, Normal, LP) for  
movies. For best camera performance, use the “HQ” (High  
Quality) or “HQ Wide” setting for movie recording.  
Movie quality is a standard that determines the detail,  
smoothness, and clarity of the image during playback.  
Reducing image quality let’s you shoot longer, so you can  
switch to “Normal” or “LP” conserve remaining memory  
capacity if you start to run low.  
[
] (REC)  
[
]
For details, see pages 94 and 288.  
Recording Time  
Movie Recording Screen  
1. Press [  
2. Press [  
] to enter the REC mode.  
] to start shooting the movie.  
” (movie icon) remains on the monitor screen while  
movie recording is in progress.  
Audio is also recorded during movie recording.  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
 
Viewing a Movie  
The film-like frame that appears on the monitor screen indicates  
that this is an image from a movie.  
1. Press [  
] to enter the PLAY mode.  
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the movie you want  
to play.  
” Movie icon  
When scrolling through images, a movie is displayed on the  
monitor screen by showing its first frame.  
[
] (PLAY)  
3. Press [SET] to start playback.  
The monitor screen will return to the image selection screen  
in step 2 after the end of the movie is reached.  
During movie playback, you can adjust volume, skip  
forward and back, and perform other operations (page  
154).  
[SET]  
To return to the REC mode  
Press [  
].  
[W] [X]  
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
 
Deleting a File  
You can use the following procedure to delete files you have  
transferred to your computer’s hard disk, images you have  
printed, or files you simply no longer need. This frees up  
memory for recording more images.  
1. Press [  
].  
2. Press [T] (  
).  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the snapshot or  
movie you want to delete.  
[
] (PLAY)  
[S]  
4. Press [S] to select “Delete”.  
To cancel the delete operation, select “Cancel”.  
5. Press [SET].  
This deletes the selected snapshot or movie.  
If you want to delete more, repeat the above procedure  
from step 3.  
[SET]  
To quit the delete operation, press [MENU].  
[W] [X]  
[T] (  
)
QUICK START BASICS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
 
INTRODUCTION  
Direct Mode Power On  
Features  
BEST SHOT for beautiful shots simply by  
selecting a sample image built into the  
camera  
Simply select the scene that is  
similar to what you want to shoot  
(Night Scene Portrait, Flower,  
etc.), for instant camera setups.  
A dedicated [BS] button gives  
you direct access to the BEST  
SHOT library of sample scenes.  
Example: Select for beautiful  
portraits.  
To view images, press  
] to power up in the  
PLAY mode.  
To record, press [  
power up in the REC  
mode.  
] to  
[
A powerful collection of useful recording  
features  
Face recognition during image recording (page 87)  
Reduction of the effects of hand and subject movement using  
high shutter speeds and an anti-shake feature (page 110)  
High-sensitivity recording avoids dark images, even when the  
flash is not being used (page 111)  
Quick Shutter, which helps you capture exactly the moment  
you want (page 128)  
High quality (H.264) movie recording (page 94)  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
   
Powerful Print Features  
DPOF feature for easy specification of date stamping and the  
number of copies (page 215)  
Timestamp feature that stamps the date into the image data  
Support for PictBridge and USB DIRECT-PRINT for easy at-  
home printing on a printer that supports one of these  
standards, without a computer (page 212)  
Read this first!  
LCD Panel  
The liquid crystal panel of the monitor screen uses high-  
precision technology that provides a pixel yield in excess of  
99.99%.  
This means that some pixels may not light or may remain lit at all  
times. This is due to the characteristics of the liquid crystal  
panel, and does not indicate malfunction.  
Document transfer to the camera  
Bundled Photo Transport software (page 239) lets you  
transfer images saved on your computer or displayed on your  
computer screen (website data, maps, etc.) to your camera.  
Bundled CASIO DATA TRANSPORT software lets you  
transfer documents from your computer to the camera and  
take it along with you (page 257).  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
 
The SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
Copyrights  
Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer, Windows Media,  
Windows Vista, and DirectX are either registered trademarks  
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
Except for your own personal enjoyment, unauthorized use of  
snapshots or movies of images recorded with this camera  
without the permission of the applicable right holder is forbidden  
by copyright laws. In some cases, shooting of public  
Macintosh, Mac OS, QuickTime, QuickTime logo, and iPhoto  
are trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
MultiMediaCard is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG  
of Germany, and licensed to the MultiMediaCard Association  
(MMCA).  
MMCplus is a trademark of the MultiMediaCard Association.  
Adobe and Reader are either registered trademarks or  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
Ulead, Ulead VideoStudio, and Movie Wizard are trademarks  
of Ulead Systems, Inc.  
HOTALBUM and the HOT ALBUM logo are registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Konica Minolta Photo Imaging,  
Inc., and licensed to HOTALBUMcom, Inc.  
YouTube, the YouTube logo and “Broadcast Yourself” are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of YouTube, LLC.  
EXILIM, Photo Loader, Photo Transport, YouTube Uploader  
for CASIO, and CASIO DATA TRANSPORT are registered  
trademarks or trademarks of CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.  
performances, shows, exhibitions, etc. may be restricted  
entirely, even if it is for your own personal enjoyment.  
Regardless of whether such files are purchased by you or  
obtained for free, posting them on a website, a file sharing site,  
or any other Internet site, or otherwise distributing them to third  
parties without the permission of the copyright holder is strictly  
prohibited by copyright laws and international treaties.  
Uploading or distributing on the Internet images of TV programs,  
live concerts, music videos, etc. that were photographed or  
recorded by you may infringe upon the rights of others. Note that  
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held liable for any  
use of this product that infringes on the copyrights of others or  
that violates copyright laws.  
The trademarks and registered trademarks shown below are  
used in an editorial fashion in the explanatory text of this manual  
without trademark ™ or registered trademark ® symbols. No  
infringement on trademarks is intended.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM was developed based on  
HOT ALBUM, which is copyrighted by HOTALBUMcom, Inc.,  
and Photo Loader, which is copyrighted by CASIO  
COMPUTER CO., LTD. All copyrights and other rights revert  
to original copyright holders.  
All other company or product names mentioned herein are  
registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective  
companies.  
Any and all unauthorized commercial copying, distribution, and  
copying of the bundled software over a network are prohibited.  
This product contains PrKERNELv4  
Real-time OS of eSOL Co., Ltd.  
Copyright© 2007 eSOL Co., Ltd.  
PrKERNELv4 is a registered  
trademark of eSOL Co., Ltd. in Japan.  
This product’s YouTube upload functionality is included under  
license from YouTube, LLC. The presence of YouTube upload  
functionality in this product is not an endorsement or  
recommendation of the product by YouTube, LLC.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
Note that the example screens and product illustrations  
shown in this manual may differ somewhat by the screens  
and configuration of the actual camera.  
The contents of this manual are subject to change without  
notice.  
The content of this manual has been checked at each step  
of the production process. Please contact us if you notice  
anything that is questionable, erroneous, etc.  
Any copying of the contents of this manual, either in part or  
its entirety, is forbidden. Except for your own personal use,  
and other use of the contents of this manual without the  
permission of CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. is forbidden  
under copyright laws.  
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held liable for  
any damages or loss suffered by you or any third party due  
to the use or malfunction of this product.  
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held liable for  
any damages or loss suffered by you or any third party due  
to the use of Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM, Photo  
Transport, YouTube Uploader for CASIO, and/or CASIO  
DATA TRANSPORT.  
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held liable for  
any damages or loss caused by deletion of memory contents  
due to malfunction, repair, or any other reason.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Directly Viewing the Sun or Bright Light  
Never look at the sun or any other bright light through the  
cameras viewfinder. Doing so can damage your eyesight.  
Precautions during Use  
Take test shots before shooting the final  
shot.  
Flash  
Before shooting your final image, shoot a test shot to ensure  
Never use the flash unit in areas where flammable or  
explosive gas may be present. Such conditions create the risk  
of fire and explosion.  
Never fire the flash in the direction of a person operating a  
motor vehicle. Doing so can interfere with the driver’s vision  
and creates the risk of accident.  
that the camera is recording correctly.  
Avoid Use While In Motion  
Never use the camera to record or play back images while  
operating an automobile or other vehicle, or while walking.  
Looking at the monitor while in motion creates the risk of  
serious accident.  
Never fire the flash too close to the eyes of the subject. Doing  
so creates the risk of loss of eyesight.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
 
Display Panel  
Transport  
Do not apply strong pressure to the LCD panel surface or  
subject it to strong impact. Doing so can cause the display  
panel glass to crack.  
Never operate the camera inside of an aircraft or anywhere  
else where operation of such devices is restricted. Improper  
use creates the risk of serious accident.  
Should the display panel ever become cracked, never touch  
any of the liquid inside the panel. Doing so creates the risk of  
skin inflammation.  
Smoke, abnormal odor, overheating, and  
other abnormalities  
Should display panel liquid ever get into your mouth,  
immediately rinse your mouth out and contact your physician.  
Should display panel liquid ever get into your eyes or onto  
your skin, immediately rinse with clean water for at least 15  
minutes and contact your physician.  
Continued use of the camera while it is emitting smoke or  
strange odor, or while it is overheating creates the risk of fire  
and electric shock. Immediately perform the following steps  
whenever any of the above symptoms are present.  
1. Turn off the camera.  
2. Remove the battery from the camera, taking care to  
protect yourself against burn injury.  
Connections  
Never plug any devices that are not specified for use with this  
camera into connectors. Connecting a non-specified device  
creates the risk of fire and electric shock.  
3. Contact your dealer or nearest CASIO authorized service  
center.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Water and Foreign Matter  
Dropping and Rough Treatment  
Water, other liquids, or foreign matter (especially metal)  
getting inside the camera creates the risk of fire and electric  
shock. Immediately perform the following steps whenever any  
of the above symptoms are present. Particular care is  
required when using the camera where it is raining or  
snowing, near the ocean or other body of water, or in a  
bathroom.  
Continued use of the camera after it is damaged by dropping  
or other rough treatment creates the risk of fire and electric  
shock. Immediately perform the following steps whenever any  
of the above symptoms are present.  
1. Turn off the camera.  
2. Remove the battery from the camera.  
3. Contact your dealer or nearest CASIO authorized service  
center.  
1. Turn off the camera.  
2. Remove the battery from the camera.  
3. Contact your dealer or nearest CASIO authorized service  
center.  
Keep Away From Fire  
Never expose the camera to fire, which can cause it to  
explode and creates the risk of fire and electric shock.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
Disassembly and Modification  
Backing Up Important Data  
Never try to take the camera apart or modify it in any way.  
Doing so creates the risk of electric shock, burn injury, and  
other personal injury. Be sure to leave all internal inspection,  
maintenance, and repair up to your dealer or nearest CASIO  
authorized service center.  
Always keep backup copies of important data in camera  
memory by transferring it to a computer or other storage  
device. Note that data can be deleted in the case of camera  
malfunction, repair, etc.  
Memory Protection  
Locations To Be Avoided  
Whenever replacing the battery, be sure to follow the correct  
procedure as described in the documentation that comes with  
the camera. Incorrectly replacing the battery can result in  
corruption or loss of data in camera memory.  
Never leave the camera in any of the following types of  
locations. Doing so creates the risk of fire and electric shock.  
– Areas subject to large amounts of humidity or dust  
– Food preparation areas or other locations where oil smoke  
is present  
– Near heaters, on a heated carpet, in areas exposed to  
direct sunlight, in a closed vehicle parked in the sun, or  
other areas subject to very high temperatures  
Never place the camera on an unstable surface, on a high  
shelf, etc. Doing so can cause the camera to fall, creating the  
risk of personal injury.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Should you ever notice leakage, strange odor, heat  
generation, discoloration, deformation, or any other abnormal  
condition while using, charging, or storing a battery,  
immediately remove it from the camera or charger unit and  
keep it away from open flame.  
Rechargeable Battery  
Use only the specified charger unit or the specified device to  
charge the battery. Attempting to charge the battery by an  
unauthorized means creates the risk of battery overheating,  
fire, and explosion.  
Do not use or leave the battery under direct sunlight, in an  
automobile parked in the sun, or in any other area subject to  
high temperatures. Doing so can damage the battery, and  
cause deterioration of its performance and loss of service life.  
If the battery charging does not end normally within the  
specified charging time, stop charging anyway and contact  
your local CASIO authorized service center. Continued  
charging creates the risk of battery overheating, fire, and  
explosion.  
Battery fluid can damage your eyes. Should battery fluid get  
into your eyes accidentally, immediately rinse them with clean  
tap water and then consult a physician.  
Be sure to read the user documentation that comes with the  
camera and special charger unit before using or charging the  
battery.  
Do not expose or immerse the battery in fresh water or salt  
water. Doing so can damage the battery, and cause  
deterioration of its performance and loss of service life.  
This battery is intended for use with a CASIO Digital Camera  
only. Use with any other device creates the risk of the battery  
damage, or deterioration of battery performance and service  
life.  
Failure to observe any of the following precautions creates  
the risk of battery overheating, fire, and explosion.  
– Never use or leave the battery near open flame.  
– Do not expose batteries to heat or fire.  
– Make sure the battery is oriented correctly when it is  
connected to the charger unit.  
– Never carry or store the battery together with items that can  
conduct electricity (necklaces, pencil lead, etc.)  
– Never disassemble the battery, pierce it with a needle, or  
expose it to strong impact (hit it with a hammer, step on it,  
etc.), and never apply solder to it. Never place the battery  
into a microwave oven, heater, high-pressure generating  
device, etc.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
If a battery is to be used by young children, make sure that a  
responsible adult makes them aware of the precautions and  
proper handling instructions, and make sure that they handle  
battery correctly.  
AC Adaptor  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk of fire and electric  
shock. Make sure you observe the following precautions  
when using the AC adaptor.  
Should fluid from a battery accidentally get onto clothing or  
your skin, immediately rinse it off with clean tap water.  
Prolonged contact with battery fluid can cause skin irritation.  
– Use only the AC adaptor specified for this camera.  
– Use the AC adaptor to supply power only to devices that  
are specified for use with it.  
– Use a 100 to 240V AC (50/60Hz) wall outlet as a power  
source.  
– Never plug the power cord into a wall outlet that is shared  
by other devices, or into a shared extension cord.  
Misuse of the AC adaptor can cause it to become damaged,  
creating the risk of fire and electric shock. Make sure you  
observe the following precautions when using the AC adaptor.  
– Never place heavy objects on the AC adaptor or subject it  
to direct heat.  
– Never try to modify the AC adaptor or subject it to bending.  
– Do not twist or pull on the power cord.  
– Should the power cord or plug ever become damaged,  
contact your dealer or nearest CASIO authorized service  
center.  
Never touch the AC adaptor while your hands are wet. Doing  
so creates the risk of electric shock.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk of fire and electric  
shock. Make sure you observe the following precautions  
when using the AC adaptor.  
– Never locate the power cord near a stove or other heating  
device.  
When unplugging from the wall outlet, grasp the plug on  
the AC adaptor power cord. Never pull on the power cord.  
– Insert the plug into the wall outlet as far as it will go.  
– Unplug the AC adaptor from the wall outlet before leaving  
the camera unattended for long periods, such as when  
leaving on a trip, etc.  
USB Cradle and AC Adaptor Precautions  
Make sure you always remove the camera from the USB  
cradle before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.  
Charging, USB data communication, the Photo Stand  
operation can cause the AC adaptor to become warm. This is  
normal and does not indicate malfunction.  
– At least once a year, unplug the AC adaptor from the wall  
outlet and clean off any dust built up around the prongs.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Battery Life  
Data Error Precautions  
Battery continuous operation times provided in this manual  
represent the approximate amount of time before the camera  
turns off due to low battery power when being powered by the  
special battery under normal temperature (23°C (73°F)). They  
do not guarantee that you will be able to achieve the indicated  
level of operation. Actual battery life is greatly affected by  
ambient temperature, battery storage conditions, the amount  
of time spent in storage, etc.  
Leaving the camera on can run down battery and cause the  
low battery warning to appear. Turn off the camera whenever  
you are not using it.  
The low battery warning indicates that the camera is about to  
turn off due to low battery power. Charge the battery as soon  
as possible. Leaving low or dead batteries in the camera can  
lead to battery leakage and data corruption.  
Your digital camera is manufactured using precision digital  
components. Any of the following creates the risk of  
corruption of data in camera memory.  
While the camera is performing an operation, removing the  
battery or memory card from the camera, or placing the  
camera onto or removing it from the USB cradle  
While the operation lamp is flashing green after turning off  
the camera, removing the memory card from the camera or  
placing the camera onto or removing it from the USB cradle  
– Disconnecting the USB cable, removing the camera from  
the USB cradle, or disconnecting the AC adaptor from the  
USB cradle while a data communication operation is being  
performed  
– Using a battery that is low  
– Other abnormal operations  
Any of the above conditions can cause an error message to  
appear on the monitor screen (page 285). Perform the action  
indicated by the message that appears.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Operating Environment  
Power Supply  
The operating temperature range of the camera is 0°C to  
40°C (32°F to 104°F).  
Do not place the camera in any of the following locations.  
– In an area exposed to direct sunlight, or large amounts of  
moisture or dust  
– Near an air conditioner or in other areas subjected to  
extreme temperature or humidity  
– Inside of a motor vehicle on a hot day, or in an area  
subjected to strong vibration  
Use only the special rechargeable lithium ion battery (NP-20)  
to power this camera. Use of any other type of battery is not  
supported.  
The camera does not have a separate battery for the clock.  
The date and time settings of the camera are cleared about  
12 hours after power is totally cut off (from both the battery  
and USB cradle). If this happens, be sure to reconfigure these  
settings after power is restored (page 202).  
Lens  
Condensation  
Never apply too much force when cleaning the surface of the  
lens. Doing so can scratch the lens surface and cause  
malfunction.  
You may sometimes notice some distortion in certain types of  
images, such as a slight bend in lines that should be straight.  
This is due to the characteristics of lens, and does not  
indicate malfunction of the camera.  
Sudden and extreme temperature changes, such as when the  
camera is moved from the outdoors on a cold winter day into  
a warm room, can cause water droplets called “condensation”  
to form on the interior and the exterior of the camera. Note  
that condensation can cause malfunction of the camera. To  
avoid condensation, place the camera into a plastic bag  
before subjecting it to sudden temperature change. Wait until  
the air in the bag has had enough time to become acclimated  
to the new temperature before removing the camera. After  
that, open the battery cover and leave it open for a few hours.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
 
Caring for your camera  
Other Precautions  
Fingerprints, dirt, and other foreign matter on the lens surface  
can interfere with proper operation of the camera. Avoid  
touching the lens surface. To clean the lens surface, use a  
blower to blow off dust or foreign matter and then wipe with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
The camera becomes slightly warm during use. This is normal  
and does not indicate malfunction.  
Fingerprints, dirt, and other foreign matter on the flash can  
interfere with proper operation of the camera. Avoid touching  
the flash. If the flash becomes dirty, wipe it clean with a soft,  
dry cloth.  
To clean the camera, wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.  
Monitor Screen Images  
The images that normally appear on the monitor screen  
during image playback are smaller than normal, and so you  
cannot see all of the detail of the actual image. Your camera  
has an image zoom feature (page 165) which you can use to  
enlarge the monitor screen image. You can use this feature  
for on-the-spot checks of important images.  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
GETTING READY  
2. Load the battery into the camera.  
Charging the Battery  
Your camera is powered by a rechargeable lithium ion battery  
(NP-20).  
With the EXILIM logo on the battery facing upwards (in the  
direction of the monitor screen), hold the stopper in the  
direction indicated by the arrow as you slide the battery into  
the camera. Press the battery in until the stopper secures it  
IMPORTANT!  
in place.  
Use of any type of battery other than NP-20 is not  
supported.  
Stopper  
To load the battery  
1. Open the battery cover.  
While pressing the battery cover, slide it in the direction  
indicated by the arrow.  
NP-20  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
         
3. Close the battery cover.  
To charge the battery  
Swing the battery cover closed, and then slide it securely  
into place as you press it against the camera.  
1. Plug the USB cradle into a household power  
outlet.  
USB Cradle  
AC Adaptor  
The battery is not fully charged when you use the camera  
for the first time after purchasing it. Use the following  
procedure to charge it.  
[DC IN 5.3V]  
AC power cord  
2. Make sure the camera is turned off.  
If the camera is on, be sure to press [ON/OFF] to turn it off  
before placing it onto the USB cradle.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
   
When charging is complete  
3. With the camera positioned so the monitor  
screen is facing towards you as shown in the  
illustration, place it onto the USB cradle.  
The [CHARGE] lamp lights red and charging starts.  
It takes about two hours to achieve a full charge. Actual  
charging time depends on current battery capacity,  
remaining power, and charging conditions.  
The [CHARGE] lamp, which was lit red during charging,  
changes to green.  
Remove the camera from the USB cradle and unplug the AC  
power cord from the power outlet.  
If the [CHARGE] lamp flashes green  
This indicates that charging cannot be performed because you  
have just finished using the camera, or because the temperature  
in your location is too hot or too cold. If this happens, wait until  
the camera returns to normal temperature. When the camera  
returns to a temperature where charging can be performed, the  
[CHARGE] lamp will light red.  
Cradle contact  
Carefully insert the camera  
as far as it will go.  
[CHARGE] lamp  
Camera contact  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
   
If the [CHARGE] lamp flashes red  
IMPORTANT!  
This indicates that the camera or battery is faulty, or that the  
battery is loaded in the camera incorrectly.  
Use only the bundled USB cradle or the separately  
available special charger unit (BC-11L) to charge the  
special rechargeable lithium ion battery (NP-20). The  
battery cannot be charged using any other type of charger  
device. Attempting to use a different charger can result in  
unexpected accident.  
This camera is designed for use only with the USB cradle  
that comes with it. Never try to use any other type of cradle.  
Use only the AC adaptor that comes bundled with the  
camera. Never use any other type of AC adaptor. Use of  
the separately available AD-C30, AD-C40, AD-C620, or  
AD-C630 is not supported.  
Remove the battery from the camera and check if its contacts  
are dirty. If they are, wipe them off with a dry cloth and then  
reload the battery into the camera. After confirming that the AC  
adaptor is plugged into the power outlet and the USB cradle, set  
the camera on the cradle again.  
If an error still continues to occur after you perform the above  
steps, it could mean that the battery is faulty. Contact your  
nearest CASIO authorized service center.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
Battery Life and Number of Images between  
Checking Remaining Battery Power  
As battery power is consumed, a battery indicator on the monitor  
Charges  
See page 291 for details.  
screen indicates remaining power as shown below.  
Remaining  
Power  
Battery Power Conservation Tips  
High  
Low  
When you do not need to use the flash, select “  
” (flash off)  
Battery  
for the flash setting (page 75).  
Indicator  
Enable the Auto Power Off and the Sleep features to protect  
against wasting battery power when you forget to turn off the  
camera (page 45).  
Indicator  
Color  
Light  
blue  
Orange  
Red  
Red  
” indicates that battery power is low. Charge the battery as  
soon as possible.  
Recording is not possible when “  
battery immediately.  
” is indicated. Charge the  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
 
Replacing the Battery  
IMPORTANT!  
Due to differences in the power requirements of each  
mode, the battery indicator may show a lower level in the  
PLAY mode than what it shows in a REC mode. This is  
normal, and does not indicate malfunction.  
Leaving the camera for about 12 hours with no power  
supplied while the battery is dead will cause its date and  
time settings to be cleared. You will have to re-configure  
the settings after power is restored.  
1. Open the battery cover.  
2. With the camera oriented with its monitor  
screen facing upwards as shown in the  
illustration, slide the stopper in the direction  
indicated by the arrow and hold it there.  
This will cause the battery to come out part way.  
Stopper  
3. While still holding the stopper, pull the battery  
out the rest of the way.  
4. Load a new battery.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
 
Storage Precautions  
Battery Precautions  
Though a rechargeable lithium ion battery provides high  
capacity in a compact configuration, long-term storage while  
charged can cause it to deteriorate.  
– If you do not plan to use a battery for some time, fully use  
up its charge before storing it.  
– Always remove the battery from the camera when you are  
not using it. Leaving a battery in the camera can cause it to  
discharge and go dead, which will require longer charging  
when you need to use the camera.  
Precautions during Use  
Operation provided by a battery under cold conditions is  
always less than operation under normal temperatures. This  
is due to the characteristics of the battery, not the camera.  
Charge the battery in an area where the temperature is within  
the range of 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F). Charging outside  
this temperature range can cause charging to take longer  
than normal or even cause charging to fail.  
– Store batteries in a cool, dry place (20°C (68°F) or lower).  
If a battery provides only very limited operation following a full  
charge, it probably means that the battery has reached the  
end of its service life. Replace the battery with a new one.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
 
Using the Camera in another Country  
Turning Power On and Off  
Note the following precautions.  
Turning Power On  
The bundled AC adaptor is designed for operation with any  
power supply in the range of 100V to 240V AC, 50/60Hz.  
Note, however, that the shape of the power cord plug  
depends on each country or geographic area. Before taking  
the camera and AC adaptor along on a trip, check with travel  
agent about the power supply requirements in your  
destination(s).  
To turn power on and enter the REC mode  
Press [ON/OFF] (Power) or [  
] (REC).  
To turn power on and enter the PLAY mode  
Press [ ] (PLAY).  
Do not connect the AC adaptor to a power supply through a  
voltage converter or similar device. Doing so can lead to  
malfunction.  
Pressing a button causes the operation lamp to light green  
momentarily and turns on power.  
Operation Lamp  
[ON/OFF] (Power)  
Extra Batteries  
Taking along extra fully charged batteries (NP-20) is  
recommended while on a trip in order to avoid not being able to  
shoot images due to the battery going dead.  
[
] (PLAY)  
[
] (REC)  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
           
Turning Power Off  
Press [ON/OFF] (Power).  
IMPORTANT!  
Pressing [ON/OFF] or [  
] (REC) to turn on power also  
causes the lens to extend. Take care there is nothing  
pressing against or hitting the lens. Holding the lens with  
your hand so it cannot extend creates the risk of  
malfunction.  
NOTE  
You can configure the camera so power does not turn on  
when you press [  
also configure the camera to turn off when you press [  
(REC) or [ ] (PLAY) (page 208).  
] (REC) or [  
] (PLAY). You can  
]
NOTE  
Pressing [  
] (PLAY) while in the REC mode switches to  
the PLAY mode. The lens retracts about 10 seconds after  
switching modes.  
Auto Power Off (page 45) will turn off power automatically if  
you do not perform any operation for a preset amount of  
time. If this happens, turn power back on.  
Turning On Power for the First Time  
The first time you load a battery into the camera, a screen  
appears for configuring screen text language, date, and time  
settings. Use the procedure under “Configuring Display  
the settings correctly.  
IMPORTANT!  
Failure to set the date and time will cause the wrong  
date and time data to be recorded with images.  
If you make a mistake when configuring the language,  
date, and time settings, you can change the settings  
(pages 202, 206).  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Sleep and Auto Power Off always operate as described below  
in the PLAY mode, regardless of their current PLAY mode  
settings.  
– Sleep does not function in the PLAY mode.  
– The Auto Power Off trigger time is always five minutes.  
Battery Power Conservation Features  
This camera is equipped with a sleep function and auto power  
off function to conserve battery power. You can configure these  
settings in the REC mode as described below.  
Feature  
Name  
Description  
Settings  
1. Press [MENU].  
The monitor screen turns off (goes  
into a sleep state) if no operation is  
performed for a preset amount of  
time. Press any button to turn the  
monitor screen back on.  
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the “Set Up” tab.  
30 sec  
1 min  
2 min  
Off  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the item you want to  
configure (“Sleep” or “Auto Power Off”) and  
then press [X].  
Sleep  
Note that the Sleep feature does not  
operate in the PLAY mode.  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the sleep or Auto  
Power Off trigger time and then press [SET].  
Selecting “Off” for the sleep setting disables the sleep  
feature.  
Power turns off if no operation is  
performed for a preset amount of  
time.  
1 min  
2 min  
5 min  
Auto Power  
Off  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
   
Using a Memory Card  
NOTE  
When both sleep and Auto Power Off have the same time  
settings, Auto Power Off takes priority.  
Sleep and Auto Power Off are disabled under the following  
conditions.  
You can store images you shoot with the camera on a memory  
card. It is up to you to purchase a commercially available  
memory card. In addition to memory card storage, the camera  
also has built-in memory, which is enough to hold a few  
snapshots or a short movie. Use built-in memory for test  
purposes, emergency use, etc.  
When there is a connection between the camera and  
computer or other device via the USB cradle  
– During a slideshow  
– During Voice Recording playback or recording  
– During movie recording and playback  
NOTE  
Images can be copied between the camera’s built-in  
memory and a memory card (page 194).  
The following data is stored in built-in memory. It cannot be  
copied to a memory card.  
– Face Recognition data saved with Record Family  
– BEST SHOT mode user image information  
– FAVORITE folder  
– Mode memory settings  
– Start-up screen image  
GETTING READY  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
 
Supported Memory Cards  
IMPORTANT!  
Your camera supports use of the  
following types of memory cards.  
SD Memory Card  
SDHC Memory Card  
MMC (MultiMediaCard)  
MMCplus (MultiMediaCardplus)  
For information about memory card  
capacity, see page 287.  
See the instructions that come with the memory card for  
information about how to use it.  
Certain types of cards can slow down processing speeds. If  
you are using a slow memory card, you may not be able to  
record a movie using the “UHQ”, “UHQ Wide”, “HQ”, or  
“HQ Wide” image quality setting. Because of this, use of a  
memory card with a maximum transfer speed of at least  
10MB per second is recommended.  
Certain types of memory cards take longer to record data,  
which can cause movie frames to be dropped. “  
” and  
Memory Used for Storage  
” flash on the monitor screen during recording to let  
Images recorded while a memory card is loaded are saved to  
the memory card. When no memory card is loaded, images are  
saved in built-in memory.  
Note that you cannot save images in built-in memory while a  
memory card is loaded in the camera.  
you know when a frame has been dropped. Use of a  
memory card with a maximum transfer speed of at least  
10MB per second is recommended.  
SD memory cards and SDHC memory cards have a write  
protect switch. Use it when you need to guard against  
accidentally deleting data. Note, however, if you write  
protect a memory card you must then turn write protection  
off whenever you want to record to the card, format it, or  
delete any of its images.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
 
Electrostatic charge, electrical noise, and other  
Loading a Memory Card into the Camera  
phenomena can cause data to become corrupted or even  
lost. Make sure that you always back up important data on  
other media (CD-R, CD-RW, MO disk, hard disk, etc.).  
IMPORTANT!  
Make sure you always turn off the camera before loading or  
removing a memory card.  
Be sure to orient the card correctly when loading it. Never  
try to force a memory card into the slot when you feel  
resistance.  
1. Open the battery cover.  
While pressing the battery cover, slide it in the direction  
indicated by the arrow.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
   
2. Load a memory card into the camera.  
Positioning the memory card so its front is facing upwards  
(towards the monitor screen side of the camera), slide it into  
the card slot all the way in until you hear it click securely into  
place.  
Replacing the Memory Card  
1. Remove the memory card from the camera.  
Press the memory card and then release it, so it comes part  
way out. Pull the card out the rest of the way by hand.  
MEMORY  
CARD  
Y
R
Y
R
O
EM  
CARD  
MEMO  
CARD  
M
Front  
Back  
2. Load the other memory card.  
3. Close the battery cover.  
Swing the battery cover closed, and then slide it securely  
into place as you press it against the camera.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
 
Formatting a Memory Card  
IMPORTANT!  
Before using a new memory card for the first time, you need to  
format it. Once you format a memory card, you will not need to  
format it each time you use it.  
Formatting a memory card that already has files on it will delete  
its contents.  
Never insert anything besides a supported memory card  
(page 47) into the memory card slot.  
Should water or any foreign object ever get into the card  
slot, immediately turn off the camera, remove the battery,  
and contact your retailer or nearest CASIO authorized  
service center.  
IMPORTANT!  
Never remove a card from the camera while the operation  
lamp is flashing green. Doing so can cause the image save  
operation to fail and even damage the memory card.  
Note that data deleted by a memory card format operation  
cannot be recovered. Double-check to make sure that you  
really want to delete all the contents of the memory card  
before proceeding with the format operation.  
Even if the file data on a memory card is protected (page  
190), formatting the card will delete all its data.  
Be sure to use the camera to format a memory card.  
Formatting a memory card on a computer and then using it  
in the camera can slow down data processing by the  
camera. In the case of an SD memory card or SDHC  
memory card, formatting on a computer can result in non-  
conformity with the SD format, causing problems with  
compatibility, operation, etc.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
   
1. Load the memory card you want to format into  
Memory Card Precautions  
the camera.  
If a memory card starts to behave abnormally, you can restore  
normal operation by reformatting it. However, it is  
recommended that you always take along more than one  
memory card whenever using the camera far away from the  
home or office.  
If you experience problems while trying to playback recorded  
images, try re-formatting the memory card.  
As you record data to and delete data from a memory card a  
number of times, it loses its ability to retain data. Because of  
this, periodic re-formatting of a memory card is  
recommended.  
2. Turn on the camera and press [MENU].  
3. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Format” and then  
press [X].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Format” and then  
press [SET] to start formatting.  
After formatting is complete, enter the PLAY mode and  
check to make sure the “There are no files.” message  
appears on the monitor screen.  
Make sure that the battery is charged fully before starting a  
formatting operation. Formatting may not be performed  
correctly and the memory card may be damaged if the  
camera powers down while formatting is in progress.  
Never open the battery cover while formatting is in progress.  
Doing so can damage the memory card.  
To exit the format operation without formatting, select  
“Cancel”.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
Menu Screen Operation Buttons  
Using On-screen Menus  
[W] [X] Select tabs. [X] is also used to apply a setting.  
[S] [T] Select a setting option.  
The following are menu operations you will need to use to  
configure camera settings. Take a few moments to become  
familiar with them.  
See “Menu Reference” on page 273 for information about  
menu contents.  
[SET] Applies the selected settings.  
[MENU] Exits the menu screen.  
You also can use the Operation Panel (page 55) to configure  
some of the settings that appear on the menu screen. In any  
case where the same setting can be configured both on the  
Operation Panel and on the menu screen, the Operation  
Panel operation is always shown.  
The following is the procedure for menu operations in the REC  
mode.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
This displays the menu screen.  
Example Menu Screen  
Tabs  
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the tab where the  
item you want to configure is located.  
Here, we will select the “REC” tab.  
Press [MENU] to display the  
menu screen.  
Menu contents are different in  
the REC mode and PLAY  
mode. This screen shows a  
REC mode menu.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to  
select the item you  
want to configure and  
then press [X].  
Settings  
Example: Select “Focus” and  
then press [X].  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
   
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want.  
Configuring Monitor Screen Settings  
You can use the display menu to configure various monitor  
screen settings.  
See “Display Menu Reference” on page 277 for information  
about display menu contents.  
5. Apply the setting.  
Pressing [SET] applies the selected setting and exits the  
menu screen.  
Pressing [W] instead of [SET] applies the selected setting  
and returns to the menu screen. You can then continue  
configuring other settings, if you want.  
Example Display Menu Screen  
Menu contents are different in  
the REC mode and PLAY  
mode. This screen shows the  
REC mode menu.  
To select another tab, press [W], use [S] to return to the  
tab and then use [W] and [X] to switch to another tab.  
Menu Screen Operation Buttons  
Selects a setting option. [X] is also used to apply a  
setting.  
[W] [X]  
[S] [T] Selects a setting option.  
[SET] Applies the selected settings.  
[DISP] Exits the menu screen.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
   
The following is the procedure for menu operations in the REC  
mode.  
Selecting a Screen Layout (Layout)  
The contents of the layout setting menu depend on whether the  
camera is in the REC mode or the PLAY mode.  
1. In the REC mode, press [DISP].  
This will display the display menu screen.  
REC Mode Screen Layout  
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the setting you want.  
For the REC mode, the screen layout settings let you select the  
layout of icons.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want.  
If you want to configure other settings, repeat steps 2 and  
Layout Type Description  
3.  
Pressing [SET]  
in the REC  
mode while  
“Panel: On” is  
selected as the  
layout type will  
4. After all the settings are the way you want,  
press [SET].  
This will apply the settings and exit the menu screen.  
Panel: On  
cause the top  
icon of the Operation Panel to become  
highlighted (selected). You can then use the  
Operation panel to change settings. Since  
there are few icons superimposed on the  
displayed image, they do not interfere with  
recording.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
   
Panel (Operation Panel)  
Layout Type Description  
1
With this option,  
the image being  
composed  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
completely fills  
the monitor  
screen. This  
Panel: Off  
setting is best  
when you want to display the subject on a large  
16:9 aspect ratio monitor screen (page 67).  
Icons are superimposed on the displayed  
image.  
9
Image Size/Quality*1 (pages 66, 68)  
1
Flash mode (page 75)  
2
Self-timer (page 79)  
3
Face Recognition (page 87)  
4
Anti Shake (page 110)  
5
ISO sensitivity (page 135)  
White balance (page 132)  
6
7
EV shift (page 131)  
8
Date/Time*2,*3 (page 202)  
9
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
   
*1 Image quality cannot be changed using Panel (Operation  
Panel).  
3. Use [W] and [X] to change the setting.  
If you want to configure other settings, repeat steps 2 and  
*2 You can select date or time display.  
3.  
*3 You can use the “Date Style” to select either month/day or  
day/month for date display (page 203).  
4. After all the settings are the way you want,  
press [SET].  
The time display format is always 24 hours, regardless of the  
current settings of the camera’s “Adjust” (page 203).  
This will apply the settings and return to normal operation  
(no Operation Panel icon selected).  
The following procedure shows how to use Panel (Operation  
IMPORTANT!  
Panel).  
Panel (Operation Panel) is not displayed while Short  
Movie, Past Movie, Voice Recording, or Zoom Continuous  
Shutter is being used.  
1. In the REC mode,  
press [SET].  
This highlights (selects) the  
top icon of the Operation  
Panel.  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the icon of the  
setting you want to change.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
PLAY Mode Screen Layout  
The PLAY mode screen layout settings let you select how  
display images are shown on the monitor screen.  
Turning Display Information On and Off  
(Info.)  
With “Info.” you can turn display information on and off. You can  
configure separate settings for the REC mode and PLAY mode.  
Layout  
Description  
Type  
Display  
With this setting,  
100% of the display  
image is always  
Information Description  
Setting  
Turns on display  
of camera setting  
visible. With some  
4:3  
aspect ratios, black  
and other  
Show  
bands may appear  
above and below, or  
information.  
to the left and right of the image.  
With this setting, the  
display image is the  
maximum possible  
size that allows the  
entire image to be  
displayed  
Turns on display  
of camera setting  
and other  
+Histogram  
indicators, along  
Wide  
with a histogram  
(page 142).  
horizontally. With  
some aspect ratios, the top and bottom of the image  
will be cut off.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
   
Adjusting Monitor Screen Brightness  
(Brightness)  
You can use the “Brightness” setting to adjust the brightness of  
the monitor screen. This setting is the same in the REC mode  
and PLAY mode.  
Display  
Information Description  
Setting  
Turns off display  
of all information.  
Hide  
Brightness  
Description  
Setting  
With this setting, the camera detects available  
light levels and automatically adjusts the  
brightness of the monitor screen accordingly.  
Auto  
This is the setting you should normally use.  
In the PLAY mode, the brightness of the monitor  
screen remains constant even if the available  
light level changes.  
Brightness that is greater than +1, which makes  
the screen easier to view. This setting consumes  
more power.  
+2  
+1  
Bright setting for outdoor use, etc. This setting  
results in brightness that is greater than the 0  
setting.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
 
Adjusting Monitor Screen Image Quality  
(Type)  
You can use the “Type” setting to adjust the quality of the  
monitor screen image. This setting is the same in the REC mode  
and PLAY mode.  
Brightness  
Setting  
Description  
Normal monitor screen brightness for indoor use,  
etc.  
0
Low monitor screen brightness for nighttime use,  
indoor use under dark conditions, etc.  
–1  
Quality Setting Description  
Increases contrast of the monitor screen  
image so the subject stands out for easier  
Dynamic  
viewing and framing when shooting under  
bright conditions.  
Makes the monitor screen image a bit  
brighter than the actual image for more  
Vivid  
clarity. Makes recorded image brighter when  
showing it to others.  
Displays the monitor screen image so it is as  
Real  
near as possible to the one recorded by the  
camera.  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
 
Quality Setting Description  
This setting provides a clearer screen image  
If you lose your way...  
Perform one of the following operations if you find that you have  
gotten lost while performing button operations during recording  
or playback.  
when shooting under dark conditions, and  
comes in handy when recording at night with  
a tripod.  
Night  
REC mode  
Consumes slightly less power than the other  
settings, and extends battery life. Note that  
power saving is disabled when “Auto” is  
selected for the monitor screen brightness  
setting.  
To return to the normal snapshot  
Current Screen  
Power Saving  
or movie recording screen, press:  
Menu screen  
[MENU] or [  
[DISP] or [  
[BS] or [  
]
Display Menu screen  
BEST SHOT screen  
]
]
“There are no files.”  
screen  
Press [  
Press [  
].  
].  
PLAY mode screen  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
 
PLAY mode  
To return to the normal playback  
screen  
Current Screen  
Menu screen  
[MENU] or [  
[DISP] or [  
]
Display Menu screen  
REC mode screen  
]
Press [  
Press [  
]
]. You could also select  
Delete screen  
“Cancel” and then press [SET].  
GETTING READY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
IMPORTANT!  
Holding the Camera Correctly  
Take care that your fingers and the strap do not cover any  
of the areas indicated in the illustration.  
Holding the camera with one hand can result in accidental hand  
movement. Hold the camera securely with both hands when  
shooting snapshots.  
Flash  
AF Assist/Self-timer Lamp  
To protect against accidentally dropping the camera, attach  
the wrist strap and make sure it is around your fingers or wrist  
while you are operating the camera.  
The supplied strap is intended for use with this camera only.  
Never use it for any other purpose.  
Never swing the camera around by its strap.  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
Microphone  
Lens  
Hold the camera as shown in the Hold the camera so the  
illustration, with your arms firmly  
against your sides.  
flash is above the lens.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
     
Shooting a Snapshot  
NOTE  
Good-looking images are impossible if you move the  
1. Press [  
] (REC) to  
Remaining Snapshot  
Memory Capacity  
camera when you press the shutter button or while the  
Auto Focus operation is being performed. Holding the  
camera correctly, carefully press the shutter button and  
take care that you do not move the camera as the shutter  
releases. This is especially important when available  
lighting is low, which slows down the shutter speed.  
enter the REC mode.  
Confirm that the subject  
(people, scenery, etc.) and  
Auto Icon  
the Auto icon “  
” are  
displayed on the monitor  
screen.  
If any icon other than the  
Auto icon “  
” is displayed,  
switch to “Auto” (page 104).  
Focus Frame  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
     
2. Focus the image.  
3. Shoot the image.  
While the focus frame is aligned with the subject, half-press  
the shutter button.  
When the image is focused, press the shutter button the rest  
of the way.  
Auto Focus will focus the image automatically, and the focus  
frame and operation lamp will turn green. The aperture,  
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity also will be set  
automatically.  
Operation Lamp  
Shutter Button  
This will shoot the snapshot and save it to the memory card  
or the camera’s built-in memory.  
Shutter Button  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
   
If the image does not focus...  
NOTE  
If the focus frame stays red and the operation lamp is flashing  
green, it means that the image is not in focus (because the  
subject is too close, etc.). Point the camera at the subject and try  
to focus again.  
The aperture value indicates the size of the opening that  
lets light into the camera. A larger aperture value indicates  
a smaller opening. The camera adjusts this setting  
automatically.  
Shutter speed indicates the amount of time that light is  
allowed into the camera. A slower shutter speed means  
that light is allowed in for a longer time. Shutter speed is  
indicated on the monitor screen as seconds (1/1000  
second, etc.) The camera adjusts this setting automatically.  
Checking a Snapshot  
A snapshot will remain on the monitor screen for a short while  
after you shoot it and then disappear when the camera gets  
ready for the next image.  
Perform the following operation to view a snapshot after you  
shoot it.  
Press [  
].  
This will display the snapshot you just shot.  
Use [W] and [X] to scroll through other images in memory.  
To return to the REC mode, press [  
].  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
 
Fully pressing the shutter button without  
Specifying Image Size  
waiting for Auto Focus  
A digital camera image is a collection of small dots (pixels).  
The size of an image indicates how many pixels it contains, and  
is expressed as horizontal pixels × vertical pixels. The initial  
factory default image size setting is 8M (3264 × 2448 pixels).  
Note that a larger image takes up more memory.  
You can shoot snapshots by pressing the shutter button all the  
way without waiting for Auto Focus. What the camera does in  
this case depends on whether Quick Shutter (page 128) is on or  
off.  
For information about image size, image quality, and number  
of images that can be stored, see page 287.  
This setting applies to snapshots only.  
When Quick Shutter is turned on  
High-speed Auto Focus is enabled, which helps you capture  
exactly the moment you want. Quick Shutter comes in handy  
when shooting a fast-moving subject.  
For information about movie image size, see page 95.  
Some images may be out of focus when Quick Shutter is  
used.  
Quick Shutter is turned on as the initial factory default setting.  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the top option in the  
operation panel (Image Size).  
When Quick Shutter is turned off  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select an image size and  
Normal Auto Focus is performed and then the image is  
recorded.  
then press [SET].  
If you keep the shutter button depressed, images will continue  
to be shot without focus.  
Whenever possible, take a little extra time to half-press the  
shutter button in order to ensure proper focus.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
   
Selecting 3:2 (3264 × 2176 pixels) records images with an  
aspect ratio of 3:2, which matches the standard aspect ratio  
(3:2) of print paper.  
The letters “HDTV” stand for “High Definition Television”. An  
HDTV screen has an aspect ratio of 16:9, which makes them  
wider than the usual 4:3 aspect ratio of television screens of  
the past. Your camera can record images that are compatible  
with the aspect ratio of an HDTV screen.  
VGA (640 × 480 pixels) is the optimum size when attaching  
images to e-mail.  
Print paper sizes should be thought of as rough estimates  
only (200 dpi print resolution).  
NOTE  
The following information changes on the display during  
the image size selection operation.  
– Image size in pixels (1600 × 1200, etc.)  
– Optimum print paper size  
– Remaining snapshot memory capacity  
Image Size (Pixels)  
Print Paper Size  
3264 × 2448 A3 Print  
8M  
Larger  
3:2  
3264 × 2176 A3 Print  
3264 × 1840 HDTV  
16:9  
6M  
2816 × 2112 A3 Print  
2304 × 1728 A4 Print  
1600 × 1200 3.5" × 5" Print  
4M  
2M  
Smaller  
VGA  
640 × 480  
E-Mail  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
 
Specifying Image Quality  
NOTE  
Your camera lets you select “Fine” (maximum image quality),  
“Normal”, or “Economy” (maximum memory economy) for the  
image quality setting. The initial setting is “Normal”. Select “Fine”  
if you want to give priority to image quality, or “Economy” to give  
priority to the number of images you can store in memory.  
For information about image size, image quality, and number  
of images that can be stored, see page 287.  
The “Fine” setting helps to bring out details when shooting  
a finely detailed image of nature that includes dense tree  
branches or leaves, or an image of a complex pattern.  
This setting applies to snapshots only.  
For information about movie image quality, see page 94.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “  
then press [X].  
Quality” and  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the image quality  
setting you want and then press [SET].  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
   
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
Turning Off the AF Assist Lamp  
The AF assist lamp emits light that helps the camera focus when  
you half-press the shutter button under dark lighting conditions.  
The AF assist lamp does not light when lighting is bright.  
The initial factory default  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “AF Assist Light”  
and then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Off” and then press  
AF Assist/Self-timer Lamp  
setting is AF assist lamp on.  
[SET].  
Turning off the AF assist lamp  
using the following procedure  
is recommended when  
shooting the image of a  
nearby person.  
When you want to turn on the AF assist lamp, select “On”  
here.  
IMPORTANT!  
Do not look directly into the AF assist/self-timer lamp or  
point it directly at a person’s eyes.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
   
Shooting Indoors under Fluorescent  
Snapshot Shooting Precautions  
Lighting  
Minute flickering of fluorescent lighting can affect the  
brightness or color of an image.  
Operation  
While the operation lamp is flashing green, never open the  
battery cover or place the camera onto or remove it from the  
USB cradle. Doing so can result in incorrect storage of the  
image you just shot, damage to other images stored in  
memory, malfunction of the camera, etc.  
If unneeded light is shining directly onto the lens, shade the  
lens with your hand when shooting an image.  
Monitor Screen when Shooting Snapshots  
The image that appears on the monitor screen is for image  
composition. The actual image will be recorded at the quality  
set for the image quality setting.  
Subject brightness conditions can cause monitor screen  
response to slow and can cause digital noise in the monitor  
screen image.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
 
Auto Focus Restrictions  
Proper focus may not be possible when shooting the following  
types of subjects.  
– Solid color wall or other very low contrast subject  
– Strongly back lit subject  
Shooting with Zoom  
Your camera provides you with 3X optical zoom (which changes  
the lens focal distance), which can be used in combination with  
digital zoom (which digitally process the center portion of the  
image to enlarge it) for total zoom capabilities of 12 - 45.2X.  
– Very shiny subject  
– Blinds or other subject with a repeating horizontal pattern  
– Multiple subjects at varying distances from the camera  
– Subject in a dark location  
– Subject that is too far away for light from the AF assist lamp  
to reach  
IMPORTANT!  
Generally speaking, the higher the digital zoom factor, the  
coarser the image that is recorded. However, digital zoom  
can be used up to a certain point without causing  
deterioration of the image.  
Digital zoom is not supported while “Timestamp” (page  
141) is turned on.  
– Fast-moving subject  
– Subjects outside the focus range of the camera  
Proper focus may not be possible if the camera is moved  
while shooting.  
An image may be out of focus even though the operation  
lamp is lit green and the focus frame is green.  
If you cannot focus properly, try using focus lock (page 127)  
or manual focus (page 129).  
1. Enter the REC mode.  
[
][  
] Zoom button  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
       
2. Press the zoom button to change the zoom  
NOTE  
factor.  
Performing a zoom operation changes the lens aperture.  
Use of a tripod is recommended to protect against hand  
movement when using the telephoto setting (zoom in).  
Optical zoom is disabled while shooting a movie. Digital  
zoom only is available while shooting a movie. Make sure  
you select the optical zoom setting you want to use before  
you press the shutter button to start shooting your movie.  
Press this side of the  
zoom button:  
To do this:  
Enlarge the subject and narrow  
the range  
[
[
] (telephoto)  
Reduce the size of the subject  
and broaden the range  
] (wide angle)  
– For more information, see “Optical Zoom and Digital  
Wide Angle  
Telephoto  
3. Press the shutter button to shoot.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom Switch Point  
Undeteriorated Image Quality  
Range  
Deteriorated Image Quality  
Range  
If you hold down the [  
] side of the zoom button in step 2 of  
the above procedure, the zoom operation will stop when the  
optical zoom factor reaches its maximum. Momentarily releasing  
the zoom button and then holding down its [  
to digital zoom, which you can use to set an even higher zoom  
factor.  
] side will switch  
3X to 15.1X*  
Optical/Digital Switch Point  
1X  
12X to 45.2X*  
Zoom Pointer  
(Indicates current  
zoom.)  
When the zoom pointer moves past the maximum limit of  
optical zoom. Also, the zoom bar indicates the approximate  
zoom factor.  
Image Deterioration Point  
Image starts to deteriorate from here.  
* Point factor depends on image size.  
Digital Zoom Indicator  
Zoom Values for Each Image Size  
Deteriorated Image  
Quality Range  
Undeteriorated Image  
Quality Range  
Focus Range  
(Displayed when shooting  
with Auto Focus, macro, or  
manual focus.)  
Zoom Bar  
8M  
1X  
1X  
1X  
1X  
1X  
1X  
1X  
3X  
12X  
12X  
3:2  
3X  
3X  
16:9  
6M  
12X  
3.5X  
4.2X  
6.1X  
15.1X  
13.7X  
16.7X  
24.0X  
45.2X  
4M  
2M  
VGA  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
     
The image deterioration point depends on the image size  
(page 66). The smaller the image size, the higher the zoom  
factor you can use before reaching the image deterioration  
point.  
Though digital zoom generally causes a deterioration of  
image quality, some digital zoom without image deterioration  
is possible with image sizes of “6M (2816 × 2112 pixels)” and  
smaller. The range in which you can use digital zoom without  
image deterioration is indicated on the display. The  
deterioration point depends on the image size.  
Turning Off Digital Zoom  
You can turn off digital zoom if you want to use optical zoom  
only. This will help to avoid deteriorated images due to  
accidentally switching over from optical zoom to digital zoom  
when shooting snapshots.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Digital Zoom” and  
then press [X].  
The digital zoom range of the zoom indicator is shown on the  
monitor screen only while “Digital Zoom” is turned on.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Off” and then press  
[SET].  
If you want to show the entire digital zoom range, select  
“On” here.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
 
Approximate Flash Range (ISO Sensitivity: Auto)  
Using Flash  
Perform the following steps to select the flash mode you want to  
use.  
Wide Angle: 0.15 m to 3.9 m (0.5' to 12.8')  
Telephoto : 0.4 m to 2.0 m (1.3' to 6.6')  
The flash range changes in accordance with optical zoom.  
Flash Setting  
Description  
1. In the REC mode, press [T] (  
) once.  
Auto Flash Flash fires automatically in accordance with  
exposure (amount of light and brightness)  
conditions.  
Flash mode  
Initial factory default setting.  
Flash Off  
Flash On  
Flash does not fire.  
Flash always fires.  
This setting can be used to brighten a  
subject that normally comes out dark due  
to daylight or backlight (daylight synchro  
flash).  
[T] (  
)
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the flash setting you  
want and then press [SET].  
Soft Flash Always use soft flash, regardless of  
exposure conditions.  
This causes an indicator identifying the selected flash mode  
to appear on the monitor screen.  
Use this setting when you want to  
suppress the flash to avoid reflection, etc.  
Red Eye  
Reduction  
Flash fires automatically in accordance  
same conditions as Auto Flash. This setting  
can be used to reduce the red eye effect that  
occurs in images of people shot with flash.  
3. Press the shutter button to shoot.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
   
Red-eye reduction  
NOTE  
Using the flash to shoot at night or in a dimly lit room can cause  
red spots inside the eyes of people who are in the image. This is  
caused when the light from the flash reflects off of the retina of  
the eye. When red-eye reduction is selected as the flash mode,  
the camera fires a pre-flash to cause the irises in the eyes of any  
people in the image to close, which reduces the chance of red  
eye.  
When operation panel setting is turned off (page 54), you  
can cycle through the flash modes by pressing [T]  
(
).  
IMPORTANT!  
When using flash, take  
care that the flash window  
is not blocked by your  
fingers or the camera  
strap.  
Flash  
IMPORTANT!  
Note the following important points when using red-eye  
reduction.  
– Red-eye reduction does not work unless the people in  
the image are looking directly at the camera (flash).  
Before pressing the shutter button, call out to the  
subjects so they all look at the camera.  
– Red-eye reduction may not work very well if the subjects  
are located far away from the camera.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
Checking the Flash Mode  
The current flash mode is indicated on the monitor screen and  
by the operation lamp when you half-press the shutter button.  
Changing the Flash Intensity  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Flash Intensity”  
and then press [X].  
Operation Lamp  
Flashes orange while the flash is charging.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the flash intensity  
setting you want and then press [SET].  
You can set one of five levels, from –2 (weakest) to +2  
(strongest).  
2
N
AF  
” indicates flash will fire.  
IMPORTANT!  
Flash intensity may not change when the subject is too far  
away or too close.  
You will not be able to take another flash snapshot until the  
operating lamp stops flashing orange, which indicates that  
charging is complete.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
 
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
Using Flash Assist  
The subject in an image will look too dark if flash intensity is not  
enough to reach a subject that is too far away. When this  
happens, you can use flash assist to supplement the brightness  
of the subject so it appears as if flash illumination was sufficient.  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Flash Assist” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Off” and then press  
[SET].  
When you want to use flash assist, select “Auto” here.  
IMPORTANT!  
Flash assist may not produce the desired result for some  
types of subjects.  
Any of the following can result in the flash assist effect  
being canceled out.  
Flash assist used  
Flash assist not used  
– Changing the flash intensity (page 77)  
– Correcting brightness (EV shift) (page 131)  
– Changing ISO sensitivity (page 135)  
– Changing the contrast setting (page 141)  
Flash assist is turned on as the initial factory default setting.  
Use the following procedure to turn off flash assist when you do  
not want to use it.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
Flash Precautions  
The desired effect may not be obtained when the subject is  
too far away or too close.  
Flash charging time depends on operating conditions (battery  
condition, ambient temperature, etc.) With a fully charged  
battery, it takes anywhere from a few seconds to 7 seconds.  
Shooting with flash turned off when lighting is dim results in a  
slow shutter speed, which can cause image blur due to hand  
movement. Secure the camera with a tripod, etc.  
Using the Self-Timer  
With the self-timer, pressing the shutter button starts a timer,  
and the shutter is released and the image is shot after a fixed  
amount of time.  
Self-Timer Type  
Description  
10 sec  
10-second self-timer  
10s  
2-second self-timer  
When shooting under conditions that  
slow down the shutter speed, you can  
use this setting to prevent blur due to  
hand movement.  
With red eye reduction, the flash is fired automatically in  
accordance with exposure. It does not fire in areas where  
lighting is bright.  
2 sec  
2
s
The presence of outdoor sunlight, fluorescent lighting, or  
some other light source can cause abnormal image colors.  
This option shoots three images: one  
image 10 seconds after the shutter button  
is pressed, the next image one second  
after the camera gets ready to shoot after  
the first image, and the final image one  
second after the camera gets ready to  
shoot after the second image.  
X3  
x3  
(Triple Self-timer)  
Off  
Self-timer is disabled.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
   
Using the Self-timer to Shoot an Image  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
The image is not shot  
right away after you  
press the shutter button.  
Instead, shooting starts  
after the preset time  
elapses. The AF Assist/  
Self-timer Lamp flashes  
while the countdown is  
being performed.  
AF Assist/Self-timer Lamp  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the third option from  
the top in the operation panel (Self-timer).  
3. Use [W] and [X] to  
select the self-timer  
type and then press  
[SET].  
This causes an indicator  
identifying the selected self-  
timer type to appear on the  
monitor screen.  
You can interrupt an  
ongoing self-timer countdown by fully pressing the shutter  
button while the AF Assist/Self-timer Lamp is flashing red.  
4. Press the shutter button to shoot.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
Using Continuous Shutter  
Your camera has four continuous shutter modes.  
NOTE  
The indicator “1sec” appears on the monitor screen  
between Triple Self-timer shots. How long it takes for the  
camera to get ready to shoot again after it shoots an image  
depends on the image size and quality settings, whether or  
not a memory card is loaded in the camera, and the flash  
charge condition.  
Continuous  
Description  
Shutter Mode  
Normal Speed  
(Normal-speed  
Continuous  
Shutter)  
Continually records images until memory  
becomes full.  
No self-timer operation can be performed when recording  
with the any of the following settings.  
– Normal-speed continuous shutter mode or high-speed  
continuous shutter mode  
– Recording with certain BEST SHOT scenes (Short  
Movie, Past Movie, Layout, Auto Framing, Voice  
Recording)  
High Speed  
(High-speed  
Continuous  
Shutter)  
Continually records images at a speed  
that is faster than Normal-speed  
Continuous Shutter, until memory  
becomes full. Image size is fixed at 2M  
(1600 × 1200 pixels).  
The Triple Self-timer cannot be used when performing the  
following recording operations.  
Flash Cont.  
Use this mode to record up to three  
(Flash Continuous consecutive images, firing the flash for  
Shutter) each one.  
– Recording with Flash Continuous Shutter  
– Recording with certain BEST SHOT scenes (Business  
Cards and Documents, Whiteboard, etc., Old Photo, For  
YouTube)  
– Movie mode  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
   
Recording with Normal-speed  
Continuous Shutter, High-speed  
Continuous Shutter, and Flash  
Continuous Shutter  
Continuous  
Shutter Mode  
Description  
Zoom Cont.  
In this mode, you select an area on the  
(Zoom Continuous monitor screen with a selection  
Shutter)  
boundary. Then when you press the  
shutter button, the camera records the  
monitor screen image and the area  
enclosed in the selection boundary,  
digitally zoomed to twice its normal size.  
1. Press the shutter button to shoot.  
With Normal-speed continuous shutter and High-speed  
continuous shutter, images continue to be shot as long as  
you keep the shutter button depressed. Releasing the  
shutter button stops shooting.  
Flash continuous shutter can shoot up to three images.  
Shooting stops if you release the shutter button before  
three images are recorded.  
Selecting the Continuous Shutter Mode  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
IMPORTANT!  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Continuous” and  
then press [X].  
The speed of normal speed continuous shutter and high-  
speed continuous shutter depend on the type of memory  
card being used and the amount free space available in  
memory. When shooting to built-in memory, continuous  
shutter shooting is relatively slow.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the mode you want  
and then press [SET].  
This enables the continuous shutter mode you selected and  
displays its icon on the monitor screen.  
To turn off continuous shutter, select “Off”.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
   
Recording with Zoom Continuous  
Shutter  
IMPORTANT!  
Note that with zoom continuous shutter, you do not need to  
keep the shutter button depressed.  
Digital zoom is disabled while shooting with zoom  
continuous shutter.  
Zoom continuous shutter is not available when the image  
size setting is 3:2 or 16:9.  
1. Use [S], [T], [W], and  
[X] to move the  
selection boundary  
around the image of  
the subject on the left  
side of the monitor  
screen until it is  
When the image size setting is 8M or 6M, the size of the  
zoomed image produced by zoom continuous shutter is  
4M.  
located at the part you want to enlarge, and  
then press [SET].  
This will enlarge the area within the boundary and display it  
in the right side of the monitor screen.  
When Auto Focus is selected as the focus mode, the  
metering mode automatically switches to “Spot” (pages  
125, 136) and locates the Auto Focus area in the center of  
the Zoom Continuous Shutter selection boundary.  
2. Press the shutter button to shoot.  
Both the left image and the right image will be recorded.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
 
Note that the resolution of images recorded with the high-  
speed continuous shutter mode or flash continuous shutter  
mode is somewhat lower resolution and more prone to digital  
noise than images recorded with the normal-speed  
continuous shutter mode.  
“Auto” ISO sensitivity always is used for the high-speed  
continuous shutter mode or flash continuous shutter mode,  
regardless of the current ISO sensitivity setting.  
Continuous Shutter Precautions  
Starting a continuous shutter operation causes the exposure  
and focus settings to be fixed at the levels for the first image.  
The same settings are applied to all subsequent images.  
Continuous shutter cannot be used in combination with any of  
the following features.  
– Face recognition  
– Some BEST SHOT scenes (Layout, Auto Framing,  
Business Cards and Documents, Whiteboard, etc., Old  
Photo, Short Movie, Past Movie, For YouTube, Voice  
Recording)  
With the flash continuous shutter mode, the flash range is  
narrower than normal.  
– Movie mode  
When using a continuous shutter mode, keep the camera still  
until all recording is finished.  
A continuous shutter operation may stop part way through if  
memory capacity runs low.  
The continuous shutter rate depends on the current image  
size and image quality settings.  
You can select the flash mode you want with normal-speed  
continuous shutter mode.  
With high-speed continuous shutter, the flash mode  
automatically becomes “ ” (flash off).  
With the flash continuous shutter mode, the flash mode  
automatically becomes “ ” (flash on).  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
 
Recording Audio for a Snapshot  
Adding Audio to a Snapshot  
You can add an audio recording to snapshots, if you want. Use  
this feature to add a verbal explanation or a description of the  
mood to a snapshot, or to capture the sounds of the people in  
the snapshot.  
1. Press the shutter  
button to shoot.  
This monitor screen will show  
the image you just shot,  
You can record up to about 30 seconds of audio for a single  
snapshot.  
along with the “  
” icon.  
If you do not want to  
record audio at this time,  
press [MENU]. This will  
display the monitor screen  
for shooting the next  
image.  
Remaining Recording Time  
Turning on Audio Snapshot  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Audio Snap” and  
then press [X].  
2. Press the shutter button to start audio  
recording.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “On” and then press  
[SET].  
3. Press the shutter button again to stop audio  
recording.  
Recording will stop automatically after about 30 seconds if  
you do not press the shutter button.  
To turn off the audio snapshot feature, select “Off” in step  
3 of the procedure under “Turning on Audio Snapshot”.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
 
Playing Back Snapshot Audio  
NOTE  
Audio snapshots in the PLAY mode are indicated by the “  
icon.  
Press [SET] while an audio snapshot is displayed to play back  
its audio.  
For information about the playback operation, see page 152.  
After transferring an audio snapshot to your computer’s  
hard disk, you can play back the audio using QuickTime  
(pages 234, 251).  
The following shows the formats used for storing audio  
snapshot data.  
– Image Data: JPEG (.JPG extension)  
IMPORTANT!  
– Audio Data: WAVE/ADPCM (.WAV extension)  
– Approximate Audio File Size: 165 KB (30-second  
recording at 5.5 KB per second)  
Take care that you do not  
block the camera’s  
microphone with your  
fingers while recording.  
Good recording results are  
not possible when the  
camera is too far away  
from what you are trying to  
record.  
You cannot turn off the monitor screen by pressing [DISP]  
while audio recording is in progress.  
Audio snapshot capabilities are disabled while shooting  
with the Triple Self-timer or with a continuous shutter mode.  
You can, however, add audio to such a snapshot after you  
record it (page 184).  
Microphone  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
   
Performing a face recognition recording  
operation (Normal Mode)  
Face Recognition  
The face recognition feature gives priority to the human faces in  
an image for focus and brightness settings. The following  
describes to two available face recognition modes.  
1. Enter a REC mode.  
2. Press [S] (  
) once.  
Face  
Recognition Description  
Mode  
[S] (  
)
Detects human faces and adjusts focus and  
brightness accordingly.  
When multiple faces are detected, image is  
given to any relatively large face located in  
the center of the image.  
Normal mode  
Detects human faces. When multiple faces are  
detected, this mode gives setting priority to the  
faces of family members whose faces have  
been registered using Record Family.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “  
Face Detection:  
Normal” and then press [SET].  
Family First  
mode  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
     
4. Point the camera at the  
subjects.  
Using the Family First Mode to Give  
Priority to Particular Faces  
The camera will detect the  
faces of any people in the  
image. The detected faces all  
will be bounded by frames  
after detection is complete.  
Using Record Family to Pre-record Face  
Data  
To use the Family First mode, you need to pre-record facial data  
for the friends and family members to which you want to give  
priority.  
5. Half-press the shutter button.  
The focus frame of the face that is focused becomes green.  
1. Enter a REC mode.  
6. When you are ready to shoot, press the  
shutter button the rest of the way.  
The camera will adjust its settings so the framed faces are  
of proper brightness.  
2. Press [S] (  
) once.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “  
Record Family”  
and then press [SET].  
4. Point the straight at  
the person whose face  
you want to record,  
adjust as required to  
the face fits within the  
frame on the monitor  
screen, and then press  
the shutter button.  
NOTE  
Half pressing the shutter button to perform face recognition  
while “  
(Tracking)” (page 125) is selected for the AF  
area will cause the focus frame to follow the movement of  
the face.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
   
5. When the message “Face recognition  
successful!” appears, use [S] and [T] to  
select “Save” and then press [SET].  
This will record the face data and return to the recording  
screen.  
Using Edit Family to Assign a Priority Level  
to Recorded Face Data  
After recording face data, you can assign a name and a priority  
level that controls how the data is applied when shooting a  
snapshot.  
To re-record the face data, select “Cancel”.  
1. Enter a REC mode.  
NOTE  
2. Press [S] (  
) once.  
You can have up to six sets of face data recorded in the  
camera.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to  
Face data is stored in the camera’s built-in memory, in a  
folder named “FAMILY” (page 253). Any manipulation of  
the data in the “FAMILY” folder can cause the camera to  
stop operating properly. Never delete or edit any data in the  
“FAMILY” folder.  
select “ Edit  
Family” and then press  
[SET].  
This display the face data  
editing screen.  
4. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the face  
data you want to edit, and then press [SET].  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
Deleting recorded face data  
5. Use [W] and [X] to select a name, and then  
press [T].  
Perform the following steps when you want to delete recorded  
You can select any one of 12 preset names to face data.  
face data.  
6. Use [W] and [X] to select the priority level you  
1. Enter a REC mode.  
want and then press [SET].  
2. Press [S] (  
) once.  
You can select any one of four levels, from “  
(Lowest) to “ ” (Highest). Selecting “  
(Disabled) will disable face recognition.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “  
Edit Family”  
and then press [SET].  
4. Press [MENU].  
5. Use the procedures under “Deleting a Specific  
197) to delete the face data you want.  
You can exit this procedure by pressing [MENU].  
NOTE  
Formatting the camera’s built-in memory (page 209)  
deletes all the recorded face data.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
5. Half-press the shutter button.  
This will focus on the face with the highest priority (the one  
with the green frame) and adjust its brightness. When  
focusing is complete, a green focus frame will appears at  
the faces that were indicated by green frames in step 4  
above.  
Shooting a Snapshot using Recorded and  
Edited Face Data  
After you record and edit face data, you can use it to shoot  
photographs. The camera will record images in accordance with  
the priority levels you configured for each set of face data.  
1. Enter a REC mode.  
6. When you are ready to shoot, press the  
2. Press [S] (  
) once.  
shutter button the rest of the way.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “  
Face  
NOTE  
The “  
Recognition: Family First” and then press  
[SET].  
(Tracking)” is selected for the AF area whenever  
“Family First” is selected as the face recognition mode  
(page 125).  
4. Point the camera at the  
subjects.  
The camera will detect the  
faces of the people whose  
face data has been saved in  
camera memory. The  
detected faces all will be  
bounded by frames after detection is complete.  
The frames will be colored according to the priority level  
of the face: White (lowest), yellow, or green (highest). A  
green frame indicates the highest priority face when the  
image is recorded.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
Selecting the Face Detection Method (Priority)  
Face Recognition Precautions  
The maximum number of faces that can be detected at one  
time is five when “Speed” is selected for the “Priority” setting,  
and ten when “Quantity” is selected.  
Use the following procedure to specify whether you want to give  
priority to faster speed or a higher number of faces during face  
detection.  
Detection of the following types of faces is not supported.  
– A face that is partially obstructed by hair, sunglasses, a hat,  
etc  
1. Enter a REC mode.  
2. Press [S] (  
) once.  
– A face that is shaded from the light  
– A profile of a face that is not shot straight on  
– A face that is tilted left or right  
– A face that is very far away or very small  
– A face that is very close or very large  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “  
Priority” and  
then press [SET].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want,  
and then press [SET].  
– A face in an area that is very dark  
Face detection is not supported for animals or other non-  
human subjects.  
Even if you have the face of a family member recorded, the  
person’s facial expression, shooting conditions, or other  
factors can make proper recognition (highest priority  
assignment) impossible.  
Face recognition can be improved by recording multiple  
versions of the same person’s face indoors and outdoors, with  
different expressions, and at different angles.  
Select this  
To do this:  
setting:  
Minimize face detection time. Up to five  
Speed  
faces can be detected.  
Allow detection of a maximum of five to ten  
faces.  
Quantity  
NOTE  
Selecting “Quantity” while using the Normal mode will  
make it possible to detected smaller faces at a greater  
distance than when “Speed” is selected.  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
 
Face recognition in the Family First mode may be slower than  
in the Normal mode because the camera needs time to  
determine whether the faces in the image are the same as the  
recorded faces. Also, compared with the Normal mode, the  
Family First mode will not be able to recognize faces that are  
far away and small.  
If the camera is unable to find a face when you press the  
shutter button, it will focus on the center of the screen.  
Always make sure that Auto Focus (AF) is selected as the  
focus mode when shooting with face recognition. Use of no  
other focus mode is supported.  
When shooting with the camera held sideways (for a portrait  
orientation shot), face recognition may take more time when  
shooting with the camera held normally (landscape  
orientation).  
Face recognition cannot be used in combination with any of  
the following features.  
– Images recorded with certain BEST SHOT scenes  
(Business cards and documents, White board, etc., Old  
Photo, Short movie, Past movie, For YouTube, Layout,  
Auto Framing, Voice Recording)  
– Movie mode  
The following functions are disabled when shooting with face  
recognition.  
– Multi AF  
– Continuous Shutter  
– Histogram  
SHOOTING A SNAPSHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Image Quality  
(pixels)  
Approximate  
Data Rate  
Movie Image Quality  
Frame Rate  
Before shooting a movie, you should specify a movie image  
quality setting. Movie image quality is a standard that  
determines the detail, smoothness, and clarity of a movie during  
playback. Shooting with the high-quality (HQ) setting will result  
in better image quality, but it also shortens the amount of time  
you can shoot.  
545 Kilobits/  
second  
15 frames/  
second  
LP  
320 × 240  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “  
then press [X].  
Quality” and  
Each movie can be up to 10 minutes long. Movie recording  
stops automatically after 10 minutes of recording.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the quality setting  
Image Quality  
(pixels)  
Approximate  
Data Rate  
Frame Rate  
you want and then press [SET].  
The “  
” indicator is on the monitor screen while “UHQ  
5.8 Megabits/  
second  
30 frames/  
second  
Wide” or “HQ Wide” is selected for the quality setting.  
UHQ  
640 × 480  
7.0 Megabits/  
second  
30 frames/  
second  
UHQ Wide 848 × 480  
2.8 Megabits/  
second  
30 frames/  
second  
HQ  
640 × 480  
848 × 480  
640 × 480  
3.4 Megabits/  
second  
30 frames/  
second  
HQ Wide  
Normal  
1.4 Megabits/  
second  
30 frames/  
second  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
     
Movie File Formats  
Shooting a Movie  
Audio is also recorded while you shoot a movie. Audio is  
monaural.  
Movies are recorded using H.264/AVC MOV format.  
Movies you shoot with your camera can be played back on a  
computer using QuickTime 7.  
1. In the REC mode, point the camera at the  
Movie Size  
subject.  
The following shows the approximate movie file size for a one-  
minute movie.  
2. Press [  
] to start  
shooting the movie.  
Remaining Recording Time  
Image Quality  
UHQ  
Approximate Size  
43.3 MB  
“  
” is displayed while  
movie recording is in  
progress.  
UHQ Wide  
HQ  
52.3 MB  
20.8 MB  
3. Press [  
] again to  
HQ Wide  
Normal  
LP  
25.3 MB  
stop shooting.  
Each movie can be up to 10  
minutes long. Movie  
recording stops automatically  
10.4 MB  
Recording Time  
4.1 MB  
after 10 minutes of recording. Movie recording also will stop  
automatically if memory becomes full before you stop movie  
recording by pressing [  
].  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
         
Movie Recording Precautions  
IMPORTANT!  
You cannot use flash while shooting a movie.  
The camera also records audio. Note the following points  
when shooting a movie.  
Spending a long time using movie recording will cause the  
camera to become slightly warm to the touch. This is  
normal and does not indicate malfunction.  
– Take care that the  
Shooting with BEST SHOT  
microphone is not blocked  
by your fingers, etc.  
– Good results are not  
possible when the camera  
is too far away from what  
With BEST SHOT (page 104), you select the preset scene that  
is closest to the one you want to shoot, and the camera sets up  
for it automatically. Selecting the “Night Scene” BEST SHOT  
scene, for example, sets the camera to shoot bright, clear  
images at night.  
you are trying to record.  
– Operating camera buttons  
while shooting can cause  
Anti Shake Movie Recording  
button noise to be picked  
up in the audio.  
Shooting a very bright subject can cause a vertical band to  
appear in the monitor screen image. This does not indicate  
malfunction. The band will not be recorded in a snapshot, but  
will be recorded in the case of a movie.  
Microphone  
You can also use Anti Shake to reduce the effects of hand  
movement only while recording a movie (page 110). The effects  
of subject movement are not limited.  
Certain types of memory cards take longer to record data,  
which can cause movie frames to be dropped. “  
” and  
” flash on the monitor screen during recording to let you  
know when a frame has been dropped. Use of a memory card  
with a maximum transfer speed of at least 10MB per second  
is recommended.  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
     
You can perform digital zoom while shooting a movie by  
pressing [ ]. Optical zoom is not available while shooting a  
movie. To use optical zoom for a movie, use [ ] to zoom as  
required first and then press [ ] to start recording.  
The effects of camera movement in an image become more  
pronounced when you shoot close up or a large zoom factor.  
Because of this, use of a tripod is recommended under these  
conditions.  
Using Short Movie  
With Short Movie, pressing [  
] will shoot a movie that starts a  
few seconds before [  
] is pressed (first part) and ends a few  
seconds after it is pressed (second part). You can specify how  
long (in seconds) you want the first part and the second part of  
the Short Movie to be.  
Since a few seconds of action before [  
] is pressed are  
recorded, Short Movie is a good way to make sure you don’t  
miss the action of kids or other active subjects.  
You can also use MOTION PRINT (page 182) to extract still  
images of Short Movie scenes.  
When the subject is outside the camera’s focus range,  
focusing is not possible and the image will be out of focus.  
Auto Focus and Macro Focus become fixed focus while  
shooting a movie (pages 122, 123).  
[
] button pressed.  
Short Movie  
Recording Start  
Few seconds  
Few seconds  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
 
4. Use [S] and [T] to  
select how long (in  
seconds) you want the  
first part of the Short  
Movie to be and then  
press [X].  
Past part  
length  
Future part  
length  
Getting Ready to Shoot with Short Movie  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to  
select the “Short Movie” scene  
and then press [SET].  
This causes “  
monitor screen.  
Pressing [  
Short Movie with a 4-second first part  
and a 4-second second part.  
If you want to configure settings for the  
length of the first part, the length of the  
second part, or MOTION PRINT  
settings, continue from step 3.  
” to appear on the  
5. Use [S] and [T] to  
select how long (in  
seconds) you want the  
second part of the  
Short Movie to be and  
then press [X].  
] at this point will shoot a  
MOTION PRINT settings  
[BS]  
The total length of a Short Movie (first part plus second part)  
must be at least two seconds and no longer than eight  
seconds.  
If you specify five seconds for the first part in step 4, for  
example, you can specify no more than three seconds for  
the second part. Specifying a value greater than three, in  
this case, will cause the length specified for the first part to  
be reduced automatically.  
3. Press [SET].  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
6. Use [W] and [X] to select the MOTION PRINT  
Shooting a Short Movie  
setting you want and then press [SET].  
1. With the camera pointed at the subject, press  
To do this:  
Select this setting:  
[
].  
This will shoot a Short Movie of the length you specified and  
then stop shooting automatically.  
Create a snapshot with nine 9 frames  
movie frames, with the one  
To stop shooting before the specified time is up, press [  
]
recorded when [  
] is  
again.  
pressed in the center  
IMPORTANT!  
Movie data is continually recorded and stored in a buffer  
before you press [  
subject. Then at the right moment, press [  
press [ ], the remaining recording time of part two of the  
Short Movie counts down on the monitor screen.  
]. Keep the camera pointed at the  
Create a snapshot of the  
frame recorded when [  
is pressed  
1 frame  
]. When you  
]
Turn off MOTION PRINT  
Off  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
To return to the REC mode  
Using Past Movie  
Past Movie is similar to a normal movie, except that it captures  
about five seconds of whatever happened in front of the lens  
After Short Movie recording is complete, the camera stands by  
for shooting of another Short Movie.  
To exit Short Movie recording, press [BS], select something  
other than “Short Movie” and then press [SET]. If you want to set  
the camera up for normal snapshot shooting, for example, select  
“Auto” and then press [SET].  
before [  
great way to make sure that you never just miss that special  
moment because you press the [ ] button too late.  
] was pressed to start shooting. Past Movie is a  
[
] button pressed.  
Recording Start  
[
] button pressed.  
Movie  
Recording End  
Past Part Approximately 5 seconds  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
 
Getting Ready to Shoot with Past Movie  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
Shooting a Past Movie  
1. With the camera pointed at the subject, press  
[
].  
2. Press [  
] again to stop shooting.  
Movie recording also will stop automatically if memory  
becomes full before you press [  
].  
IMPORTANT!  
[BS]  
When Past Movie is selected, the camera continually  
updates an internal buffer that holds about five seconds of  
movie images of what has happened in front of the  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the “Past  
Movie” scene and then press [SET].  
This causes “  
” to appear on the monitor screen, which  
camera’s lens. When you press [  
], your movie will start  
indicates that Past Movie is enabled.  
with the buffer’s current contents and continue from there.  
Be sure to keep the camera still and pointed in the direction  
of the subject for some time before you press [  
] to start  
shooting.  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
To return to the REC mode  
Shooting a Snapshot while Shooting a  
Movie (Snapshot-In-Movie)  
After Past Movie recording is complete, the camera stands by  
for shooting of another Past Movie.  
You can shoot a snapshot while normal movie recording is in  
progress. Note, however, that movie recording (image and  
audio) is interrupted for a few seconds while the snapshot is  
recorded.  
To exit Past Movie recording, press [BS], select something other  
than “Past Movie” and then press [SET]. If you want to set the  
camera up for normal snapshot shooting, for example, select  
“Auto” and then press [SET].  
Shooting a Snapshot During a Movie  
1. While movie recording is in progress, press  
the shutter button.  
You can also half-press the shutter button to focus using  
Auto Focus.  
2. Movie recording continues after the snapshot  
is recorded.  
3. To stop movie recording, press [  
].  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
 
IMPORTANT!  
Shooting a snapshot while shooting a movie is not  
supported while any one of the following BEST SHOT  
scenes is selected.  
Short Movie, Past Movie, Business cards and documents,  
White board, etc., For YouTube, Voice Recording.  
NOTE  
You can use [T] (  
) while shooting a movie to  
change the flash mode.  
SHOOTING A MOVIE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
USING BEST SHOT  
With BEST SHOT, you simply select the sample scene that is  
like the one you are trying to shoot, and the camera sets up  
automatically. Even difficult backlight scenes (which result in the  
main subject being too dark if set up improperly) come out  
looking great!  
Selecting a Sample Scene  
1. In the REC mode,  
press [BS].  
Boundary (Currently  
Selected Sample Scene)  
This enters the BEST SHOT  
mode and displays a screen  
showing thumbnails of 15  
sample scenes.  
Some Sample Scenes  
Portrait  
Scenery  
The initial default  
selection is “  
” (Auto).  
Scene Name  
Scene Number  
Night Scene  
Night Scene Portrait  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
   
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to move the  
boundary to select the scene you want to  
select.  
3. Press [SET] to apply the settings of the  
selected scene and return to the recording  
screen.  
Pressing [S] or [T] while the boundary is at the edge of  
the screen will scroll to the next screen of BEST SHOT  
scenes.  
Pressing the zoom button will display text that explains  
the settings configured by the selected scene (page 107).  
Press the zoom button again to return to the scene  
selection screen.  
The settings of the scene you selected remain in effect  
until you select a different scene.  
To select a different BEST SHOT scene, repeat the  
above procedure from step 1.  
4. Press the shutter button (if you are shooting a  
snapshot) or [  
movie).  
] (if you are shooting a  
To return to “Auto”, select Scene 1, which is “  
” (Auto).  
Pressing [MENU] while the scene selection screen or  
scene description text is on the monitor screen will cause  
the boundary to jump directly to “  
” (Auto).  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
The BEST SHOT “For YouTube” scene sets up the camera  
for recording movies that are optimized for uploading to  
YouTube. Movies recorded with the “For YouTube” scene  
are stored in a special folder to make them easy to locate  
for uploading (page 254). Note that the image quality of  
movies recorded with the “For YouTube” scene is always  
“Normal”. Maximum recording time is 10 minutes.  
BEST SHOT scenes were not shot using this camera.  
Images shot using a BEST SHOT scene may not produce  
the results you expected due to shooting conditions and  
other factors.  
You can change the camera settings that are made when  
you select a BEST SHOT scene. Note, however, that the  
BEST SHOT settings revert to their defaults when you  
select another BEST SHOT scene or turn off the camera. If  
you think you will later need to use a particular camera  
setup you configured, save it as a BEST SHOT user setup  
(page 108).  
BEST SHOT Scene Limitations  
Business cards and documents, White board, etc., Old Photo,  
Layout, and Auto Framing.  
These scenes cannot be used to shoot a movie.  
Short Movie, Past Movie, For YouTube  
These scenes cannot be used to shoot a snapshot.  
Voice Recording  
These scenes cannot be used to shoot a snapshot or movie.  
Night Scene, Fireworks  
These scenes use slow shutter speeds. Since a slow shutter  
speed increases the chance of digital noise in the image, the  
camera automatically performs a digital noise reduction  
process on slow shutter images. Because of this, such  
images take longer to store after you press the shutter button.  
Do not perform any key operation while an image is being  
stored. Also, it is a good idea to use a tripod to avoid image  
blur due to camera movement when shooting at slow shutter  
speeds.  
IMPORTANT!  
Your camera includes a sample scene that optimizes  
settings for auction site images. Depending on your  
camera model, the sample scene is named either “For  
eBay” or “Auction”. Images you record using the auction  
site sample scene are stored in a special folder so you can  
easily find them on your computer (page 254).  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
Displaying Detailed Information about a BEST  
SHOT Scene  
To find out more about a scene,  
select it with the boundary on the  
scene selection screen and then  
press the zoom button.  
NOTE  
If you select a scene by pressing [SET] while the  
description screen is displayed, the same description  
scene will appear the next time you press [BS] to view  
BEST SHOT sample scenes.  
The following are the different operations you can perform  
while the scene description screen is on the display.  
To return to the scene selection screen, press the zoom  
button again.  
To scroll through available BEST SHOT scenes, use [W] and  
[X].  
To select the currently displayed scene and configure the  
camera with its settings, press [SET].  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
 
Creating Your Own BEST SHOT Scenes  
IMPORTANT!  
You can use the procedure below to save the setups of  
snapshots or movies that you shot as BEST SHOT scenes. After  
that, you can recall a setup whenever you want to use it.  
Formatting the camera’s built-in memory (page 209)  
deletes all the user BEST SHOT scene files.  
NOTE  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
Registering a snapshot creates a snapshot setup, while  
registering a movie creates a movie setup. A snapshot  
setup can be used to shoot snapshots only, and a movie  
setup can be used to shoot movies only.  
You can check the settings of the currently selected BEST  
SHOT scene by displaying the camera’s setting menus and  
looking at its settings.  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select “BEST  
SHOT” (Register User Scene) and then press  
[SET].  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the snapshot or  
movie whose setup you want to register.  
User snapshot scenes are assigned numbers sequentially  
in the sequence: SU1, SU2, and so on, while movies are  
assigned numbers in the sequence: MU1, MU2, and so on.  
The following are the settings that are included in a user  
snapshot scenes:  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Save” and then  
press [SET].  
Your BEST SHOT scene will be assigned the name “Recall  
User Scene”, along with a scene number.  
Face Recognition, Focus, EV Shift, White Balance, Flash,  
ISO, Metering, Flash Intensity, Flash Assist, Color Filter,  
Sharpness, Saturation, Contrast  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
   
The following are the settings that are included in a user  
movie scene:  
Focus, EV Shift, White Balance, Color Filter, Sharpness,  
Saturation, Contrast  
Deleting a BEST SHOT User Scene  
Perform the following steps when you want to delete a BEST  
SHOT user scene.  
You can store up to 999 BEST SHOT user scenes.  
User BEST SHOT scenes are stored in built-in memory  
(page 253) in the SCENE folder (snapshots) or MSCENE  
folder (movies).  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Press the zoom button to display its  
explanation screen.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the BEST SHOT user  
scene you want to delete.  
4. Press [T] (  
).  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Delete” and then  
press [SET].  
This will delete the BEST SHOT user scene you selected  
and display the next screen (either the next user scene or  
the Register User Scene).  
6. Use [W] and [X] to select another scene and  
then press [SET].  
This returns to the recording state.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
Turning on Anti Shake Using the Panel  
Reducing the Effects of Hand and  
Subject Movement  
You can turn on the camera’s Anti Shake feature to reduce  
image blur due to subject movement or hand movement when  
shooting a moving subject using telephoto, when shooting a  
fast-moving subject, or when shooting under dim lighting  
conditions.  
(Operation Panel)  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the fifth option from  
the top in the operation panel (Anti Shake).  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “Auto” and then  
You can turn on Anti Shake using BEST SHOT or by performing  
a menu operation.  
press [SET].  
This turns on Anti Shake and displays “  
” on the  
monitor screen.  
In this case, Anti Shake will remain on until you turn it off  
on the menu.  
Turning on Anti Shake Using BEST SHOT  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the “Anti  
Shake” scene and then press [SET].  
Anti Shake will remain selected until you select a different  
BEST SHOT scene.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
   
IMPORTANT!  
Taking Bright Images without Flash  
The BEST SHOT “High Sensitivity” scene makes it possible for  
you to take natural looking images without using the flash, even  
when lighting is low  
Anti Shake will not work unless the ISO sensitivity setting  
(page 135) is set to “Auto”.  
Though “  
” (Anti Shake) is displayed on the monitor  
screen following an automatic flash operation using the  
“Auto Flash” or “Red Eye Reduction” setting, or while the  
flash setting is “Flash On” or “Soft Flash”, Anti Shake is  
disabled.  
Shooting with Anti Shake can cause an image to appear  
somewhat coarser than normal and can cause slight  
deterioration of image resolution.  
Anti Shake may not be able to eliminate the effects of hand  
or subject movement when movement is severe.  
You can also use Anti Shake to reduce the effects of hand  
movement only while recording a movie. The effects of  
subject movement are not limited (page 96).  
Anti Shake may not work with a very low shutter speed. If  
this happens, use a tripod to stabilize the camera.  
The camera sometimes performs an automatic noise  
reduction operation to reduce digital noise in images  
recorded under certain lighting conditions. This operation  
causes the camera to take longer than normal to store the  
image and be ready for the next shot.  
Normal Snapshot (With flash) Snapshot with High Sensitivity  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the “High  
Sensitivity” scene and then press [SET].  
3. Press the shutter button to shoot the image.  
High Sensitivity will remain selected until you select a  
different BEST SHOT scene.  
USING BEST SHOT  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
 
IMPORTANT!  
Shooting Images of Business Cards  
and Documents (Business Shot)  
Shooting a business card, document, whiteboard, or similarly  
shaped object from an angle can cause the subject to appear  
misshaped in the resulting image. The BEST SHOT Business  
Shot scenes correct the shape of rectangular objects so they  
appear natural.  
High Sensitivity is disabled following an automatic flash  
operation using the “Auto Flash” or “Red Eye Reduction”  
setting, or while the flash setting is “Flash On” or “Soft  
Flash”.  
Shooting with High Sensitivity can cause an image to  
appear somewhat coarser than normal and can cause  
slight deterioration of image resolution.  
The desirable level of image brightness may not be  
possible under very dark conditions.  
When shooting with slow shutter speeds, use a tripod to  
protect against the effects of hand movement.  
The camera sometimes performs an automatic noise  
reduction operation to reduce digital noise in images  
recorded under certain lighting conditions. This operation  
causes the camera to take longer than normal to store the  
image and be ready for the next shot.  
Before Keystone Correction  
After Keystone Correction  
USING BEST SHOT  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
 
BEST SHOT has two Business Shot scenes from which to  
choose.  
Shooting an Image Using a Business Shot  
Scene  
Business cards and  
documents  
White board, etc.  
1. After selecting either  
of the BEST SHOT  
Business Shot scenes,  
compose the image  
and press the shutter  
button to shoot.  
This displays a screen that shows all of the rectangular  
shapes in the image that qualify as candidates for keystone  
correction.  
A red boundary will surround the currently selected  
correction candidate. If there is a black boundary, it means  
that the black boundary is indicating a second possible  
candidate. If there is no second candidate (black boundary),  
jump directly to step 3.  
If the camera is unable to detect any keystone correction  
candidate at all, the message “Cannot correct image!” will  
appear on the monitor screen momentarily and then the  
camera will save the image as-is (uncorrected).  
Selecting a Business Shot Scene  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the  
“Business cards and documents” or the  
“White board, etc.” scene and then press  
[SET].  
Whichever you select will remain in effect until you select a  
different BEST SHOT scene.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
 
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the candidate you  
IMPORTANT!  
want to use for correction.  
Make sure the entire object you are trying to shoot (correct)  
is enclosed within the monitor screen. The camera will not  
be able to detect the shape of the object correctly unless it  
is enclosed entirely within the monitor screen.  
Correction will not be possible if the subject is the same  
color as its background. Make sure the object is against a  
background that allows its outline to stand out.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Correct” and then  
press [SET].  
This will correct the image and store the resulting  
(corrected) image.  
To cancel the correction operation, select “Cancel”.  
Digital zoom is disabled while shooting with a Business  
Shot scene. However, you can use optical zoom.  
The maximum Business Shot image size is 2M (1600 ×  
1200 pixels), even if the camera is configured for a larger  
image size. When the camera is configured to record  
images smaller than 2M (1600 × 1200 pixels), Business  
Shot scenes will produce images in accordance with the  
currently specified image size.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
Restoring an Old Photograph  
With Old Photo, you can record the image of an old, faded  
photograph and then use the camera’s built-in advanced digital  
camera technology to restore it.  
NOTE  
When the camera is at an angle to the photograph you are  
recording, the shape of the photograph may appear  
distorted in the recorded image. Auto keystone correction  
corrects for this distortion, which means that a photograph  
appears normal even if you record it at an angle.  
Before Recording with Old Photo  
Make sure the entire photograph you are trying to record is  
enclosed within the monitor screen.  
Make sure the photograph is against a background that  
allows its outline to stand out, and that it fills the monitor  
screen to the maximum extent possible.  
Make sure that light is not reflecting off the surface of the  
original photograph when recording it.  
If the old photograph is portrait orientation, be sure to  
compose the image with the camera in landscape (horizontal)  
orientation.  
Selecting the Old Photo Scene  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the “Old  
Photo” scene and then press [SET].  
“Old Photo” will remain selected until you select a different  
BEST SHOT scene.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
   
4. Press the zoom button  
to zoom the cropping  
boundary.  
Recording an Image with Old Photo  
1. Press the shutter  
button to shoot the  
image.  
This displays a photograph  
contour confirmation  
screen and then saves the  
original recorded image.  
An error message will appear (page 285), without  
displaying the photograph contour confirmation screen, if  
the camera is unable to find the contour of the  
photograph.  
5. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to move the  
selection boundary to the desired location and  
then press [SET].  
The camera will correct color automatically and save the  
corrected image.  
If you do not want a border around the resulting image,  
select and area that is smaller than the original image.  
To cancel the restoration operation at any point and save  
the image as-is, press [MENU].  
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the candidate you  
want to correct.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Trim” and then  
press [SET].  
This displays a cropping boundary on the monitor screen.  
To cancel the correction operation, select “Cancel”.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
IMPORTANT!  
Recording Snapshots into a Multi-  
image Layout (Layout Shots)  
You can create a multi-snapshot image by recording snapshots  
into the frames that are arranged in a preset pattern. This lets  
you create album-like arrangements of related images in a  
single image. BEST SHOT scenes are available with three  
frames and two frames.  
Digital zoom is disabled while recording with Old Photo.  
However, you can use optical zoom.  
When recording the image of a photograph, the camera will  
not be able to recognize the shape of the photograph in the  
following cases.  
When part of the photograph extends outside of the  
monitor screen  
When the subject is the same color as the background it  
is placed upon  
Layout (Two Images)  
Layout (Three Images)  
The maximum Old Photo image size is 2M (1600 × 1200  
pixels). When the camera is configured to record images  
smaller than 2M (1600 × 1200 pixels), Old Photo will  
produce images in accordance with the currently specified  
image size.  
Under certain conditions, restored colors may not produce  
the desired results.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
 
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
5. Press the shutter button again to record the  
next snapshot.  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select “Layout”,  
If you are shooting into a three-frame layout, press the  
shutter button a third time to record the third image.  
Pressing [SET] during steps 4 or 5 of the above  
procedure will toggle between the layout screen (the one  
with the frames on it) and a screen that uses the entire  
display area to compose the image you are shooting.  
To clear the currently recorded Layout images and restart  
an ongoing Layout operation, press [MENU]. Next,  
continue from step 4 above.  
and then press [SET].  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select a background color.  
4. Press the shutter  
button to record the  
first image.  
The camera will record the  
first snapshot and then get  
ready for the next one.  
You cannot save a multi-snapshot image unless there are  
snapshots recorded in each of the available frames.  
Frame  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
IMPORTANT!  
Auto Tracking a Moving Subject (Auto  
Framing)  
With auto tracking, a boundary area follows a moving subject,  
making it easy to snap an image with the subject in the center.  
Only the final multi-snapshot image is saved in camera  
memory. The individual snapshots are not saved.  
The size of the multi-snapshot image for this operation is  
fixed automatically at 7M (3072 × 2304 pixels).  
While Layout Shot is being used, the setup of the camera is  
changed automatically as shown below.  
– ISO Sensitivity: Auto (fixed)  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select “Auto  
– AF Area: Spot (fixed)  
Framing”, and then press [SET].  
The following functions are disabled during Layout Shot.  
– Digital Zoom  
– Self-timer  
– Continuous Shutter  
– Face Recognition  
3. Align the focus frame  
Focus frame  
with the subject you  
want to focus on and  
then half-press the  
shutter button.  
The focus frame and the  
cropping boundary will  
follow the subject as it  
moves.  
Cropping boundary  
Focusing of the subject  
continues to be performed  
while you keep the shutter  
button half pressed.  
USING BEST SHOT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
 
4. Press the shutter button all the way to record  
the image.  
This will record the area enclosed within the cropping  
boundary.  
IMPORTANT!  
Only the part of the image within the cropping boundary will  
be recorded.  
The image size for this operation is fixed automatically at  
3M (2048 × 1536 pixels).  
The following functions are disabled during Auto Framing.  
– Timestamp  
– Self-timer  
– Normal-speed Continuous Shutter, High-speed  
Continuous Shutter, Flash Continuous Shutter  
– Face Recognition  
Auto Framing may not be able to follow a fast-moving  
subject. If this happens, release the shutter button, re-align  
the focus frame with the subject, and then half-press the  
shutter again.  
When shooting with “Auto Framing”, the image size is fixed  
at 3M (2048 × 1536 pixels) and the Undeteriorated Image  
Quality Range is 3X (page 73).  
USING BEST SHOT  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Changing the Focus Mode  
Your camera provides you with the five focus modes described below. The initial factory default focus mode is Auto Focus.  
Focus Mode Description  
Auto Automatic focus when the shutter button is half-pressed.  
Focus  
Focus Range*  
Auto adjustment  
(Approximately 40 cm to  
Auto Focus becomes fixed focus while shooting a movie.  
(1.3' to  
))  
Minimum distance position varies with optical zoom.  
Macro  
(Close-up)  
Used for close-up shooting. Macro Focus becomes fixed  
focus while shooting a movie.  
Auto adjustment (15 cm to 50 cm (5.9" to 19.7"))  
Minimum distance position varies with optical zoom.  
Pan  
Focus  
Fixed focus for relatively wide-range focusing. Use Pan  
Focus (PF) under conditions where Auto Focus is difficult.  
Fixed distance  
Focus range varies with optical zoom position.  
Infinity  
Focus is fixed at infinity. Use this mode when shooting  
scenery and other faraway images.  
Infinity  
Manual Focus is performed manually.  
Focus  
Focus range varies with optical zoom factor.  
Optical Zoom Factor  
Range  
1X  
3X  
15 cm to  
40 cm to  
(0.5' to  
(1.3' to  
)
)
* “Focus Range” indicates distance from the lens surface.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
     
Perform the following steps to change the focus mode.  
Using Auto Focus  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
1. Align the monitor screen’s focus frame with  
the subject you want to focus and then half-  
press the shutter button.  
1. On the “REC” tab, select “Focus” and then  
press [X].  
This camera will perform the focus operation.  
You can tell if the image is in focus by checking the  
operation lamp and the focus frame color.  
2. Use [S] and [T] to  
select the focus mode  
setting you want and  
then press [SET].  
An icon appears on the  
monitor screen to indicate  
the current focus mode.  
See the following pages of  
this section for details  
Focus Mode Icon  
Operation Lamp  
Focus Frame  
about shooting with each  
focus mode.  
Status  
Operation Lamp Focus Frame  
Focusing  
Complete  
Lit Green  
Green  
Red  
Not Focused  
Flashing Green  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
   
2. When the image is focused, press the shutter  
Using Macro Focus  
button the rest of the way to shoot.  
1. Half-press the shutter button to focus the  
image.  
IMPORTANT!  
The focus operation is the same as that for Auto Focus.  
Auto Focus becomes fixed focus while shooting a movie.  
2. When the image is focused, press the shutter  
NOTE  
button the rest of the way to shoot.  
When proper focusing is not possible because the subject  
is closer than the Auto Focus range, the camera will switch  
to the Macro Focus range automatically (Auto Macro).  
Whenever you perform an optical zoom operation while  
shooting with Auto Focus, a value will appear on the  
monitor screen as shown below to tell you the focus range.  
IMPORTANT!  
Use of the flash along with Macro Focus can cause the light  
of the flash to become blocked, which can produce  
unwanted lens shadows in your image.  
Macro Focus becomes fixed focus while shooting a movie.  
Example:  
cm –  
*
will be replaced by the actual focus range value.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
   
NOTE  
When Macro Focus cannot focus properly because the  
subject is too far away, the camera will switch to the Auto  
Focus range automatically (Auto Macro).  
Whenever you perform an optical zoom operation while  
shooting with Macro Focus, values will appear on the  
monitor screen as shown below to tell you the focus range.  
Example:  
cm –  
cm  
*
will be replaced by the actual focus range values.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
Auto Focus and Macro Focus Shooting Tips  
Changing the Auto Focus Area  
Select this  
setting:  
To do this:  
When the shutter button is half-pressed,  
have the camera automatically select  
one or more of nine possible focus  
frames  
If the camera is able to focus on  
multiple points, all applicable focus  
frames turn green.  
Use the following procedure to change the metering area used  
for Auto Focus (AF).  
Multi  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “AF Area” and then  
press [X].  
Half-pressing the shutter button focuses  
the subject and also starts a focus  
tracking operation that keeps the focus  
frame on the subject as it moves.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you  
Tracking  
want and then press [SET].  
Select this  
To do this:  
setting:  
Use a small area in the center of the  
screen for metering  
This setting is best when you want to  
Spot  
use focus lock (page 127).  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
 
NOTE  
When you select “  
Multi” as the focus area, nine focus  
frames appear on the monitor screen. The camera will  
automatically determine the optimum focus frame(s),  
which will change to green on the monitor screen.  
Spot /  
Tracking  
Multi  
Focus Frame  
Focus Frame  
“  
Multi” cannot be used in the Face Recognition  
Normal mode or the Family First mode (page 87).  
If you select “ Tracking” while using continuous  
shutter or self-timer, subject will be tracked until image  
recording starts.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
 
2. Keeping the shutter  
button half-pressed,  
re-compose the  
Using Focus Lock  
“Focus lock” is the name of a technique you can use when you  
want to shoot an image in which the subject to be focused on is  
not within the focus frame in the center of the screen.  
image as you like.  
When “  
Tracking” is  
Use focus lock with “  
Spot” or “  
Tracking” focus.  
selected as the Auto  
Focus area, the focus  
frame will move  
automatically and follow  
the subject.  
Subject to be focused on  
1. Align the monitor  
screen’s focus frame  
with the subject you  
want to focus on and  
then half-press the  
shutter button.  
3. When the image is focused, press the shutter  
button the rest of the way to shoot.  
Focus Frame  
NOTE  
Focus lock also causes exposure (AE) to be locked.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
   
Quick Shutter  
4. Press the shutter button all the way down  
without pausing.  
If you press the shutter button all the way without waiting for  
Auto Focus while Quick Shutter is turned on, the camera will  
record the image using a high-speed focus operation that is  
much faster than normal Auto Focus. This helps to avoid  
missing a special moment while you wait for the camera to  
Auto Focus.  
Pressing the shutter button all the way without pausing at  
the halfway type will record with Quick Shutter, without  
performing the normal Auto Focus operation.  
IMPORTANT!  
Some images may be out of focus when Quick Shutter is  
used.  
Quick Shutter will not work when you are using a very  
high zoom factor. In this case, you should use Auto Focus  
instead.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Quick Shutter” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you  
want and then press [SET].  
To do this:  
Select this setting:  
Turn on Quick Shutter  
Turn off Quick Shutter  
On  
Off  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
 
Using Fixed Focus (Pan Focus)  
Using Manual Focus  
Pan Focus (PF) fixes focus for a relatively wide focus range,  
which means you can shoot without waiting for the Auto Focus  
operation to finish.  
With Manual Focus, the camera  
automatically enlarges the subject  
on the monitor screen, which  
helps you manually adjust focus.  
Manual focus can be used for  
shoot such images as moving  
trains. Before the train arrives,  
manually focus on an electric pole  
or some other object. Then when  
the train passes the object you  
focused on, you can shoot without  
worrying about focus.  
1. When you are ready to shoot, press the  
shutter button all the way, without pausing.  
Using Infinity Focus  
Yellow Boundary  
As its name suggests, Infinity Focus fixes focus at infinity (  
Use this mode when shooting scenery and other faraway  
subjects. Infinity Focus also comes in handy when shooting from  
a car or train window, or when shooting scenery or other  
subjects that are difficult to focus properly with Auto Focus.  
).  
1. While Manual focus is selected as the focus  
mode, compose the image on the monitor  
screen so the subject you want to focus on is  
within the yellow boundary.  
1. While Infinity Focus is selected as the focus  
mode, press the shutter button to shoot.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
       
2. Use [W] and [X] to focus the image, as you  
view the results on the monitor screen.  
At this time the image that is within the boundary will enlarge  
and fill the monitor screen, which aids in focusing.  
NOTE  
Whenever you perform an optical zoom operation (page  
71) while shooting with manual focus, a value will appear  
on the monitor screen as shown below to tell you the  
focusing range.  
For this:  
Press this button:  
Example: MF  
cm –  
Closer focus  
More distant focus  
[W]  
[X]  
*
will be replaced by the actual focus range values.  
IMPORTANT!  
The monitor screen will return to step 1 if you do not  
perform any operation for about two seconds.  
While Manual Focus is selected as the focus mode, the [W]  
and [X] keys are used to adjust the focus setting. Any other  
functions assigned to the [W] and [X] keys with Key  
Customize (page 145) are not performed when you press  
the keys during manual focus.  
3. Press the shutter button to shoot.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
3. Use [W] and [X] to adjust the exposure  
compensation value.  
Correcting Image Brightness (EV  
Shift)  
You can manually adjust an image’s exposure value (EV value)  
before shooting it. This feature helps to achieve better results  
when shooting a backlit subject, a strongly lit subject indoors, or  
a subject that is against a dark background.  
[X]: Increases the EV value. A higher EV value is best used  
for light-colored subjects and backlit subjects.  
* Increasing the EV value also works well with the  
BEST SHOT “Backlight” scene.  
Exposure Compensation Value: –2.0EV to +2.0EV  
Unit: 1/3EV  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
2. Use [S] and [T] to  
select the second  
option from the bottom  
in the operation panel  
(EV Shift).  
[W]: Decreases the EV value. A lower EV value is best for  
dark-color subjects and for shooting outdoors on a  
clear day.  
EV Shift Value  
To cancel exposure compensation, adjust the value until it  
becomes 0.0.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
   
4. After the EV value is the way you want, press  
[SET] to apply it.  
Controlling White Balance  
Shooting on a cloudy day can give your subject a blue cast,  
while shooting under white fluorescent lighting can give your  
subject a green cast. White balance corrects for different types  
of lighting so the colors in your images always look natural.  
The exposure compensation value you set remains in effect  
until you change it.  
IMPORTANT!  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
When shooting under very dark or very bright conditions,  
you may not be able to obtain satisfactory results even  
after performing exposure compensation.  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the third option from  
the bottom in the operation panel (White  
Balance).  
NOTE  
Performing an EV shift operation while using multi-pattern  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the white balance  
metering will cause the metering mode to switch  
automatically to center weighted metering. The metering  
mode will return to multi-pattern metering when you change  
the exposure compensation value to 0.0 (page 136).  
You can use the key customization feature to configure the  
[W] and [X] buttons so they control EV shift (page 145).  
This comes in handy when adjusting exposure  
compensation while viewing the on-screen histogram  
(page 142).  
setting you want and then press [SET].  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
   
Select this  
setting:  
NOTE  
When “Auto” is selected for the white balance setting, the  
To do this:  
camera automatically determines the white point of the  
subject. Certain subject colors and light source conditions  
can cause problems when the camera tries to determine  
the white point, which makes proper white balance  
adjustment impossible. If this happens, select the white  
balance setting that matches you shooting conditions  
(Daylight, Overcast, etc.)  
You can use the key customization feature to configure the  
[W] and [X] buttons so they control the white balance  
setting (page 145).  
Let the camera adjust white balance  
automatically  
AWB Auto WB  
Daylight  
Shoot outdoors on a clear day  
Shoot outdoors on an overcast rainy day, in  
the shade, etc.  
Overcast  
Shoot in the shadow of a building, in the  
shade of trees, etc. on a clear day  
Shade  
Suppress color cast when shooting under  
white or day white fluorescent lighting  
Day White  
N
Fluorescent  
To select “Auto” with the control key (when the control key  
is configured to select the auto white balance setting),  
scroll through the settings until “ AWB ” appears on the  
monitor screen.  
Suppress color cast when shooting under  
daylight fluorescent lighting  
Daylight  
Fluorescent  
D
Suppress the appearance of light bulb  
lighting  
Tungsten  
Manually adjust white balance to suit a  
particular light source  
For details, see “Configuring the White  
MWB Manual WB  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
4. Under the lighting conditions you plan to use  
when shooting, point the camera at a blank  
white piece of paper so it fills the entire  
monitor screen and then press the shutter  
button.  
Configuring the White Balance Setting  
Manually  
Under complex lighting conditions, the preset white balance  
settings may not be able to produce natural looking colors.  
When this happens, you can configure the white balance setting  
manually for particular lighting conditions. Note that you will  
need to have a plain white sheet of paper on hand when  
performing the following procedure.  
White sheet of paper  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the third option from  
the bottom in the operation panel (White  
Balance).  
The camera will adjust white balance settings for the current  
conditions, and display “Complete” when it is finished.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select “  
MWB  
Manual WB”.  
5. Press [SET] to register the white balance  
settings and return to the shooting screen.  
The white balance setting is retained even if you turn off  
the camera.  
This will display the subject that the lens is aimed at on the  
monitor screen using the current manual white balance  
settings. If you want to use the current settings, jump  
directly to step 5.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
 
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the setting you want  
Specifying ISO Sensitivity  
and then press [SET].  
ISO sensitivity is a value that expresses sensitivity to light. A  
larger value indicates higher sensitivity, which is better for  
shooting when available lighting is dim. If you want to use faster  
shutter speeds, you should use a higher ISO sensitivity value.  
Under certain conditions, a fast shutter speed in combination  
with a high ISO sensitivity setting can cause digital noise, which  
makes an image appear rough. For clean, good-quality images,  
use the lowest possible ISO sensitivity setting.  
To shoot with this level of  
sensitivity:  
Select this  
setting:  
Automatically selected by camera.  
Low  
Auto  
ISO 64  
ISO 100  
ISO 200  
ISO 400  
ISO 800  
1. In the REC mode, press [SET].  
High  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select the sixth option from  
the top in the operation panel (ISO Sensitivity).  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
   
IMPORTANT!  
Specifying the Metering Mode  
The metering mode determines what part of the subject is  
metered for exposure.  
Using flash with high ISO sensitivity can cause problems  
with subjects that close to the camera.  
“Auto” ISO sensitivity always is used for movies, regardless  
of the current ISO sensitivity setting.  
You can use the key customization feature to configure the  
[W] and [X] buttons so they control the ISO sensitivity  
setting (page 145).  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Metering” and  
then press [X].  
Anti Shake (page 110) will not work unless the ISO  
sensitivity setting is set to “Auto”.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
Multi (Multi Metering)  
Multi-pattern metering divides the image into  
sections and measures the light in each  
section for a balanced exposure reading. The  
camera automatically determines shooting  
conditions according to the measured lighting pattern, and  
makes exposure settings accordingly. This type of metering  
provides error-free exposure settings for a wide range of  
shooting conditions.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
   
Center Weighted  
IMPORTANT!  
Center weighted metering concentrates on the  
center of the focus area to measure light. Use  
this metering method when you want to exert  
some control over exposure, without leaving  
settings totally up to the camera.  
The metering mode will change to “Center Weighted”  
automatically if you change the EV shift value (page 131) to  
anything other than 0.0 while “Multi” is selected. The  
metering mode will change back to “Center Weighted”  
when the EV shift value is changed back to 0.0.  
When “Multi” is selected as the metering mode, the  
icon will not be displayed on the monitor screen when you  
return to the REC mode information display (page 270).  
Spot  
Spot metering takes readings at a very small  
area. Use this metering method when you  
want exposure to be set according to the  
brightness of a particular subject, without  
being affected by surrounding conditions.  
NOTE  
You can use the key customization feature to configure the  
[W] and [X] buttons so they control the metering mode  
setting (page 145).  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
Reducing the Effects of Overexposure  
and Underexposure  
You can use the procedure below to expand the dynamic range,  
which makes it possible to capture the bright areas of an image  
while reducing the chance of overexposure and underexposure.  
When shooting a subject that is back lit, for example, an  
expanded dynamic range minimizes overexposure and  
underexposure.  
and then press [SET].  
Select this  
When you want to do this:  
setting:  
Apply Dynamic Range to a greater  
Expand +2  
extent than “Expand +1”  
Suppress overexposure and  
Expand +1  
underexposure  
Do not suppress overexposure and  
underexposure  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
Off  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Dynamic Range”  
and then press [X].  
You can also correct the dynamic range of a photograph  
you have already shot (page 179).  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
 
Enhancing Human Skin Textures  
You can use the procedure below to reduce digital noise from  
human skin in the recorded image and enhance its texture.  
Using the Camera’s Color Filter  
Effects  
The camera’s filter feature lets you add color tints to your images  
as you shoot them. The color effect look just like what you would  
get by installing a color filter on the lens of the camera.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Portrait Refiner”  
and then press [X].  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Color Filter” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
Select this  
When you want to do this:  
setting:  
Available filter settings are: Off, B/W, Sepia, Red, Green,  
Blue, Yellow, Pink, and Purple  
Enhance skin texture more than “Noise  
Noise Filter +2  
Filter +1”  
Enhance skin texture  
Noise Filter +1  
Off  
Turn off skin texture enhancement  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
   
Controlling Image Sharpness  
Use the following procedure to adjust the sharpness of subject  
Controlling Color Saturation  
Use the following procedure to adjust the saturation of colors in  
outlines in your images.  
your images.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Sharpness” and  
then press [X].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Saturation” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
You can specify one of five sharpness settings from +2  
You can specify one of five saturation settings from +2  
(sharpest) to –2 (least sharp).  
(most saturated) to –2 (least saturated).  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
   
Adjusting Image Contrast  
Use the following procedure to adjust the contrast of your  
Date Stamping Snapshots  
You can have the snapshot’s recording date only, or date and  
images.  
time stamped in the lower right corner of the image.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “Quality” tab, select “Contrast” and  
then press [X].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Timestamp” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
You can specify one of five contrast settings from +2 (most  
contrast between light and dark) to –2 (least contrast  
between light and dark).  
Example: December 24, 2007, 1:25 p.m.  
Select this  
To do this:  
setting:  
Display the date only (2007/12/24)  
Date  
Display the date and time (2007/12/24  
1:25pm)  
Date&Time  
Off  
Display nothing  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
       
IMPORTANT!  
Using the On-screen Histogram to  
Check Exposure  
The on-screen histogram that provides a graphic representation  
of the current exposure of the image. You can also display the  
histogram in the PLAY mode for information about the exposure  
levels of images.  
Even if you do not stamp the date and/or time with  
Timestamp, you can do so later using the DPOF function  
and the printing software function (page 218).  
Once date and time information is stamped in a print, it  
cannot be edited or deleted.  
Use the “Date Style” setting (page 203) to specify the Year/  
Month/Day format of the date.  
The recording date and time are determined in accordance  
with the camera’s clock settings (pages 11, 202) when the  
snapshot is recorded.  
Histogram  
Digital zoom is not supported while date stamping is turned  
on.  
Date stamping is not supported for the following types of  
images.  
– Some BEST SHOT images (Auto Framing, Business  
cards and documents, White board, etc., Old Photo)  
– Zoom Continuous Shutter  
1. Press [DISP].  
2. On the “Info.” tab, select “+Histogram” and  
then press [SET].  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
     
Example Histograms  
NOTE  
A histogram towards the left side  
results when the overall image is  
dark. A histogram that is too far to the  
left may result in “black out” of the  
dark areas of an image, as shown in  
the nearby image.  
You can use key customization to configure the [W] and [X]  
buttons so they control the EV shift setting. Then you can  
perform EV shift while viewing the results on the on-screen  
histogram (page 145).  
How to Use the Histogram  
A histogram is a graph that represents the lightness of an image  
in terms of the number of pixels. The vertical axis indicates the  
number of pixels, while the horizontal axis indicates lightness. If  
the histogram appears too lopsided for some reason, you can  
use EV shift to move it left or right in order to achieve better  
balance. Optimum exposure can be achieved by EV shifting so  
the graph is as close to the center as possible. For snapshots,  
you can even display individual histograms for R (red), G  
(green), and B (blue). These lines can be used to determine  
whether there is too much or too little of each of the color  
components in an image.  
A histogram towards the right side  
results when the overall image is  
light. A histogram that is too far to the  
right may result in “white out” of the  
light areas of an image, as shown in  
the nearby image.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
An overall well-balanced histogram  
results when the overall image is at  
optimal lightness.  
Other Useful Recording Functions  
The following functions are also available in the REC mode to  
help make your digital image more efficient and enjoyable.  
Assign functions to the [W] and [X] keys  
Display an on-screen grid for easy image composition  
Review an image you just recorded  
Register initial power up settings  
Reset settings  
IMPORTANT!  
A centered histogram does not necessarily guarantee  
optimum exposure. If you intentionally want to over expose  
or under expose the image, you may not want a centered  
histogram.  
Due to the limitations of exposure compensation, you may  
not be able to achieve an optimum histogram configuration.  
Use of the flash and certain shooting conditions can cause  
the histogram to indicate exposure that is different from the  
actual exposure of the image when it was shot.  
This histogram does not appear when shooting with face  
recognition (page 87).  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
 
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
Using Key Customize to Assign  
Functions [W] and [X]  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “L/R Key”, and then  
press [X].  
Key Customize lets you assign any one of the five functions  
listed below to the [W] and [X] keys. Once you do, you will be  
able to use the assigned functions while shooting snapshots or  
movies, without going through the menus. For details about  
each of the functions, see the referenced page numbers.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the function you  
want to assign and then press [SET].  
After you assign a function, you can control its setting using  
the [W] and [X] keys.  
When this function is  
assigned:  
You can use [W] and [X] to do  
this:  
Selecting “Off” leaves the [W] and [X] keys with no function  
assigned.  
Metering (page 136)  
Change the metering setting  
Perform EV shifting for  
exposure compensation  
EV Shift (page 131)  
Change the white balance  
setting  
White Balance (page 132)  
Change the ISO sensitivity  
setting  
ISO (page 135)  
Self-timer (page 79)  
Select the self-timer time  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
 
Displaying an On-screen Grid  
The on-screen grid can be displayed on the REC mode monitor  
Displaying the Image You Just Recorded  
(Image Review)  
When you purchase your camera, it is initially configured with  
the Image Review feature turned on. Image Review displays the  
image you just recorded so you can check it.  
screen for easy alignment when composing images.  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Review” and then  
press [X].  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Grid” and then  
press [X].  
To configure the camera to do this  
after an image is recorded:  
Select this  
setting:  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
Display the image for about one second On  
and then press [SET].  
Nothing  
Off  
To do this:  
Select this setting:  
Display the grid  
Hide the grid  
On  
Off  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
   
Using Icon Help  
IMPORTANT!  
Icon help displays guidance text about an icon when you select it  
on the monitor screen while in the REC mode.  
The icons listed below do not appear on the display while  
icon help is turned off.  
Icon help text is displayed for the following functions:  
Recording mode, metering, flash mode, white balance, self-  
timer, EV shift. Note, however, that metering, white balance,  
self-timer and EV shift icon help text appears only when  
“Metering”, “White Balance”, “Self-timer” or “EV shift”  
respectively is assigned to the [W] and [X] keys with the key  
customization feature (page 145).  
– Flash mode  
White balance  
– Metering mode  
icon (page 75)  
AWB  
icon (page 132)  
icon (page 136)  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Icon Help” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
Select this  
To do this:  
setting:  
Display icon help text next to the icon of  
On  
a function when you select the function  
Turn off icon help  
Off  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
 
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
Using Mode Memory to Configure Power  
On Default Settings  
and then press [SET].  
You can configure the camera so it saves certain settings in  
“mode memory” whenever it is turned off, and restores the  
settings the next time you turn the camera back on. This keeps  
you from having to configure the camera each time you turn it off  
and on.  
Select this  
To do this:  
setting:  
Save the current setting when the  
camera turned off, and restore it when  
the camera is turned back on  
On  
Off  
See step 4 of the setting procedure below for information about  
the settings you can save with mode memory.  
Restore the optimum default when the  
camera is turned on  
1. In the REC mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “REC” tab, select “Memory” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the item you want to  
configure and then press [X].  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
 
*1 “On” restores the selected BEST SHOT scene when the  
camera is turned back on. “Off” exits BEST SHOT when the  
camera is turned off.  
Mode  
Memory On  
Setting  
Mode Memory Off  
Exits BEST SHOT  
when camera is  
turned off.  
*2 Optical zoom position only.  
BEST SHOT*1  
IMPORTANT!  
Flash  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Spot  
Multi  
Off  
Turning the camera off while mode memory for the BEST  
SHOT mode is on will restore the settings of the BEST  
SHOT scene what was selected when you last turned off  
the camera. This is true, regardless of any of the mode  
memory on/off settings of each individual setting, except for  
Zoom Position.  
Focus  
White Balance  
ISO  
AF Area  
Setting at  
power off  
Metering  
Self-timer  
Flash Intensity  
Digital Zoom  
0
On  
Focus mode before  
manual focus was  
selected.  
MF Position  
Zoom Position*2  
Full wide  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
Resetting the Camera to Its Initial  
Factory Defaults  
Use the following procedure when you want to return to the  
camera to its initial factory default settings, which are the ones  
that are configured when you first purchase the camera. See  
“Menu Reference” on page 273 for the initial factory default  
setting for each menu item.  
IMPORTANT!  
The following are not initialized when you reset the camera  
(page 275).  
– Home Time setup  
World Time setup  
– Adjust  
– Date Style  
– Language  
1. Press [MENU].  
– Video Out  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Reset” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Reset” and then  
press [SET].  
To cancel the procedure without resetting, select  
“Cancel”.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
   
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
The file type icon that appears at the top of the monitor  
screen depends on the type of file (snapshot, movie,  
audio only, etc) that is currently displayed.  
Viewing a Snapshot  
Use the following procedure to view snapshots on the camera’s  
monitor screen.  
: Snapshot (page 151)  
: Movie (page 153)  
: Audio snapshot (page 152)  
1. Press [  
] to enter the PLAY mode.  
See page 57 information about how to hide the image  
information and view the image alone.  
2. Use [W] and [X] to scroll between images.  
Press [X] to scroll forward and [W] to scroll back.  
[
]
[X]  
[X]  
This will display one of the snapshots in memory, along with  
some information about the settings used to shoot it (page  
272).  
[W]  
[W]  
File Type Folder/File Names  
Image Quality  
Image Size  
Date and Time  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
       
Listening to the Audio of an Audio  
Snapshot  
You can use the following procedure to play the audio of an  
audio snapshot. An audio snapshot is indicated by the “  
type icon.  
NOTE  
Holding down [W] or [X] scrolls at high speed.  
The image that initially appears when scrolling may appear  
to be a bit rough at first, but it will soon be replaced by an  
image with better definition. Note that if you copy an image  
from another type of digital camera, only a rough image  
may be shown on the monitor screen.  
” file  
1. Enter the PLAY mode  
and then use [W] and  
[X] to display the  
audio snapshot whose  
audio you want to  
play.  
To switch to the REC mode  
Press [  
].  
2. Press [SET] to play the snapshot’s audio from  
the camera’s built-in speaker.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
   
Audio Playback Controls  
To do this:  
Viewing a Movie  
Use the following procedure to view a movie on the camera’s  
Do this:  
Fast forward or fast reverse  
playback  
monitor screen.  
Hold down [X] or [W].  
1. Enter the PLAY mode and then use [W] and  
[X] to display the movie you want to play.  
Check the file type icon. The file type icon of a movie is  
Pause or restart playback  
Adjust volume  
Press [SET].  
Use [S] and [T].  
Press [DISP].  
Press [MENU].  
Change on-screen indicators  
Stop playback  
” (Movie) icon (page 272).  
File Type  
Folder Name/File Name  
Recording Time  
You can adjust volume while playback is in progress or paused  
only.  
Quality  
The film-like frame that appears on the monitor screen  
indicates that this is an image from a movie.  
2. Press [SET] to start playback.  
The monitor screen will return to the selection screen in  
step 1 after the end of the movie is reached.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
   
To switch to the REC mode  
Press [ ].  
To do this:  
Do this:  
Zoom in up to 4.5X  
While an image is zoomed, you can use  
[S] [T] [W] and [X] to move around and  
view the parts of the image that do not  
fit on the monitor screen.  
Movie Playback Controls  
To do this:  
Press the zoom  
button (  
).  
Do this:  
Fast forward or fast reverse playback.  
Each press of either button increases  
the speed of the fast forward or fast  
reverse operation up to three steps.  
Hold down [X] or  
[W].  
Stop playback  
Press [MENU].  
IMPORTANT!  
Return from fast forward/fast reverse to  
normal playback  
Playback may not be possible for movies not recorded with  
this camera.  
Press [SET].  
Press [SET].  
Pause or restart playback  
When paused, scroll forward or back  
frame-by-frame  
Hold down either button to scroll non-  
stop.  
Press [X] or [W].  
Adjust volume  
Volume can be adjusted only while  
movie playback is in progress.  
Use [S] and [T].  
Toggle on-screen indicators on or off  
Press [DISP].  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
 
Playing Back a Movie with Anti Shake  
NOTE  
Use the following procedure when you want to play back a  
movie with Anti Shake. Anti Shake is particularly useful when  
you have the camera connected to a TV for viewing, since the  
effects of camera movement are more evident on a big screen.  
You can press [  
movie is stopped or playing.  
You can also use the following procedure to turn Anti  
Shake on and off.  
] to turn Anti Shake on and off while the  
1. While a movie is playing, press [MENU].  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to display  
2. Select the “PLAY” tab, select “  
then press [X].  
Anti Shake”, and  
the movie you want to play with Anti Shake.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “On”, and then press [SET].  
When Anti Shake is turned on, the area of the monitor  
screen used for playback is slightly smaller than normal.  
2. Press [  
] to turn on Anti Shake.  
Each press of [  
] toggles Anti Shake on and off.  
“ ” (Anti Shake indicator) is displayed on the monitor  
screen while Anti Shake is turned on.  
3. After the setting is the way you want, press  
[SET].  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
 
Images  
All images: Includes all snapshots, movies,  
and audio in memory.  
Playing a Slideshow on the Camera  
The slideshow feature lets you play the files stored in memory in  
sequence, automatically.  
You can configure the slideshow so it plays the files the way you  
want.  
(Select the  
files you want  
to include in  
the  
Only: Includes snapshots and audio  
snapshots only.  
Only: Includes movies only.  
slideshow.)  
One Image: Includes only one specific  
image (selected using [W] and [X]).  
Favorites: Includes snapshots in the  
FAVORITE folder (page 192).  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Slideshow” and  
then press [X].  
Time (Specify Use [W] and [X] to select one of the following  
the time of the times (in minutes): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30,  
slideshow,  
from start to  
finish.)  
3. Configure the slideshow settings.  
Use [S] and [T] to select an item and then configure it as  
described below.  
60.  
Interval  
(Select the  
interval  
between  
slides.)  
Use [W] and [X] to select a value from 1 to 30  
seconds, or “MAX”.  
– If you specify a value from 1 to 30  
seconds, images change at the  
specified interval, but the audio portion  
of movies and audio snapshots will  
continue to play until the end,  
regardless of the interval setting.  
When “MAX” is selected, only the first  
frame of each movie is displayed,  
without any playback of the audio.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
     
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Start” and then  
press [SET] to start the slideshow.  
The slideshow is performed in accordance with the settings  
you configured above.  
Effect (Select Use [S] and [T] to select the effect you  
a special  
effect.)  
want.  
Pattern 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: Plays background  
music and applies an image change effect.  
– Pattern 1 through 4 use the same  
special effects but each use different  
background music. Pattern 5 uses  
different effects from patterns 1 through  
4.  
You can also scroll through images during a slideshow by  
pressing [X] (forward) and [W] (back). Note that this  
operation is not possible when “Pattern 5” is selected for  
the “Effect” setting.  
To adjust the level of audio volume during a slideshow,  
use [S] and [T] to adjust the volume.  
– Selecting “Pattern 5” changes the  
“Images” setting to “  
Only” and  
To stop a slideshow  
disables the “Interval” setting.  
Off: No background music plays and no  
image change effect is performed.  
The current effect setting is disabled  
automatically in following cases.  
When the “Images” setting is “  
Only”, “One Image”, or “Favorites”.  
When the “Interval” setting is “MAX”,  
one second, or two seconds.  
Press [SET]. This will return to the PLAY mode.  
Pressing [MENU] instead of [SET] stops the slideshow and  
returns to the menu screen.  
Pressing [  
] instead of [SET] stops the slideshow and  
switches to the REC mode.  
When the slideshows changes to or  
from a movie file or a voice recording  
file.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
157  
Changing the Background Music  
You can change from the built-in background music that plays  
when you execute “Effect” to other background music.  
IMPORTANT!  
All button operations are disabled while the slideshow is  
switching from one image to another. Wait until an image is  
stopped on the display before performing a button  
operation. If a button does not work, wait a bit and try  
again.  
Supported File  
File Types: IMA ADPCM format WAV files  
Sampling Frequencies: 22.05 kHz/44.1 kHz  
Audio: monaural  
Number of Files: 9  
NOTE  
Selecting a movie when “One Image” is selected for  
File names: SSBGM001.WAV to SSBGM009.WAV  
Store the music files on your computer using the above  
names.  
“Images” and then selecting a movie for the slideshow will  
cause the movie to play back repeatedly within the time  
specified by the slideshow “Time” setting.  
In image copied from a computer or an image recorded  
with a different type of digital camera may remain on the  
screen longer than the time specified by “Interval”.  
IMPORTANT!  
Regardless of which effect pattern is selected, the  
background music is looped.  
Depending on the BGM file format, some background  
music data may not be playable.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
Transferring Background Music to the Camera  
3. Create a folder named “SSBGM”.  
You can select background music after its file has been saved to  
the memory card or the camera’s built in memory.  
4. Double-click the “SSBGM” folder you created  
and copy the background music file to it.  
1. Connect the camera to your computer (pages  
5. Disconnect the camera from the computer  
If you save a background music file to a memory card,  
load the card into the camera.  
2. Perform one of the following operations to  
open the memory card or built-in memory.  
Windows  
Based on your operating system, perform one of the  
following steps.  
1
Windows XP users: Click “Start” and then “My  
Computer”.  
Windows Vista users: Click “Start” and then  
“Computer”.  
Windows 2000/Me/98SE/98 users: Double-click “My  
Computer”.  
Double-click “Removable Disk”.  
Your computer recognizes the memory card loaded in  
the camera (or built-in memory if there is no card) as a  
removable disk.  
2
Macintosh  
Double-click the camera’s drive icon.  
1
Your computer recognizes the memory card loaded in  
the camera (or built-in memory if there is no card) as a  
drive.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
Playing a Slideshow on the USB Cradle  
IMPORTANT!  
(Photo Stand)  
The background music files will be loop played in  
sequence.  
You can play a slideshow on the camera while it is mounted on  
the USB cradle. This is a good way to enjoy a long slideshow,  
without worrying about the camera’s battery going dead.  
Configure slideshow settings (page 156) before performing  
the steps below.  
If both the memory card loaded in the camera and the  
camera’s built-in memory contain background music files,  
the files on the memory card are played.  
See the user documentation that comes with your  
computer for information about moving, copying, and  
deleting files.  
Connect the bundled AC adaptor to the USB cradle, and plug  
it into a power outlet.  
1. Turn off the camera and place it onto the USB  
Folder Structure  
Memory Card or Built-in Memory  
cradle.  
DCIM  
SSBGM  
(Background Music Folder)  
SSBGM001.WAV (Background Music File)  
SSBGM002.WAV (Background Music File)  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
To stop a slideshow  
2. Press the USB cradle’s  
[PHOTO] button to start  
the slideshow.  
Press the USB cradle’s [PHOTO] button. This will turn off the  
camera.  
The slideshow is performed in  
accordance with the settings  
you configured with the  
procedure on page 156. The  
camera will turn off  
IMPORTANT!  
The battery does not charge while a slideshow is in  
progress. To charge the battery, stop the slideshow.  
Do not remove the camera from the cradle while a  
slideshow is in progress. Doing so can cause data to  
become corrupted.  
[PHOTO]  
automatically after the time you specified with the “Time”  
setting elapses.  
You can change the slideshow setting by pressing  
[MENU] while a slideshow is in progress. After  
configuring the settings, press [MENU] again to restart  
the slideshow.  
To adjust the level of audio volume during a slideshow,  
use [S] and [T] to adjust the volume.  
NOTE  
You can connect the USB cradle to a TV and enjoy the  
slideshow on a big screen. You can also connect to a video  
recording device and record a slideshow (page 162).  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
   
4. Press [  
] (PLAY) to turn on the camera and  
enter the PLAY mode.  
Viewing Camera Images on a TV  
Use the procedure below to view snapshots and movies on a TV  
screen.  
When the camera turns on in the PLAY mode, an image will  
appear on the TV screen. The camera’s monitor screen will  
not turn on.  
1. Connect the USB cradle to a TV.  
Pressing [ON/OFF] or [  
] (REC) will not turn on the  
camera.  
VIDEO IN Jack (Yellow)  
AUDIO IN Jacks (White)  
5. Now you can perform the applicable operation  
on the camera for the type of file you want to  
play.  
Audio  
Video  
TV  
At this point you could press the USB cradle’s [PHOTO]  
Yellow  
White  
button to start a slideshow (page 161).  
AV Cable  
To turn off the camera  
You can turn off the camera by doing either of the following.  
Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button.  
[AV OUT] (AV output port)  
Press the USB cradle’s [USB] button.  
2. Turn off the camera and place it onto the USB  
cradle.  
3. Turn on the TV and select its video input  
mode.  
If the TV has more than one video input, select the one  
where the USB cradle is connected.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
       
You can use the camera’s USB cradle to connect to a DVD  
recorder or video deck and record images from the camera.  
There are various different methods you can use in order to  
connect to another device when recording images. The  
following describes one method for connection using the  
AV cable that comes with the camera.  
– DVD recorder or video deck: Connect to the VIDEO IN  
and AUDIO IN terminals.  
– USB cradle: Connect to the [AV OUT] (AV output port)  
– Camera: Place onto the cradle  
IMPORTANT!  
When connecting to a TV to display images, be sure to  
configure the camera’s [  
buttons for “Power On” or “Power On/Off” (page 208).  
All icons and indicators that appear on the monitor screen  
also appear on the TV screen.  
] (REC) and [  
] (PLAY)  
You can use [DISP] to change the display contents.  
Audio is monaural.  
Certain TVs may cut off part of the images.  
Audio is initially output by the camera at maximum volume.  
When you first start displaying images, set the TV volume  
control at a relatively low level and then adjust it as  
required.  
You can play a slideshow of snapshots and movies on the  
camera and record it on a DVD or video tape. You can  
record movies by selecting “  
Only” for the slideshow  
“Images” setting (page 156). When recording to DVD  
recorder or video deck, you can turn off display information  
(page 57) so indicators and other information is not  
recorded along with the image.  
NOTE  
After using an optionally available AV cable (EMC-3A) to  
connect the camera’s cradle connector directly to the  
VIDEO IN terminal of a TV (without using the USB cable),  
you can view recorded images on the TV.  
To view the image that is being recorded, connect a TV or  
other monitor to the DVD recorder or video deck that is  
connected to the camera. For information about connecting  
a monitor to the DVD recorder or video deck and about how  
to record, see the user documentation that comes with the  
DVD recorder or video deck you are using.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
Selecting the Screen Aspect Ratio and Video  
IMPORTANT!  
Output System  
Select the aspect ratio (4:3 or 16:9) that matches the type  
of TV you plan to use. You may also need to configure the  
aspect ratio setting on your TV as well. Incorrect aspect  
ratio settings on the camera and/or the TV can result in  
abnormal image display.  
Images will not display correctly unless the camera’s video  
signal output setting matches the video signal system of  
the TV or other video equipment.  
You can use the procedure in this section to select either NTSC  
or PAL as the video output system. You can also specify an  
aspect ratio of 4:3 or 16:9.  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Video Out” and  
then press [X].  
Images will not display correctly on a TV or video  
equipment that is not NTSC or PAL.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
Select this video  
For this type of TV:  
output system:  
Standard aspect ratio screen NTSC  
NTSC 4:3  
TV (Japan, U.S., and other countries)  
Wide aspect ratio screen NTSC TV  
NTSC 16:9  
(Japan, U.S., and other countries)  
Standard aspect ratio screen PAL TV  
PAL 4:3  
(Europe and other areas)  
Wide aspect ratio screen PAL TV  
PAL 16:9  
(Europe and other areas)  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
To zoom back out, press the zoom button (  
).  
Zooming the Displayed Image  
Perform the following procedure to zoom the image currently on  
the monitor screen up to eight times its normal size.  
If display indicators are turned on, an indicator in the lower  
right corner of the monitor screen shows what part of the  
zoomed image is currently displayed.  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to display  
To scroll images during zoom  
the snapshot you want to zoom.  
After performing a zoom operation, you can scroll between  
snapshots by pressing [SET] and then using [W] and [X] to  
scroll.  
2. Press the zoom button  
).  
Zoom Factor  
Image Area  
(
When the snapshot you want is displayed, press [SET] again  
to return [W] and [X] to their zoom functions.  
Each press of this button  
zooms the image more.  
You can use [S], [T], [W],  
and [X] to move to a different  
part of the image after  
zooming.  
To return to image to normal size  
Press [MENU] or [BS].  
IMPORTANT!  
Depending on the image size, some images may not be  
able to be zoomed to the full 8 times normal size.  
Part of the image that is  
currently displayed.  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
   
Using the 12-image Screen  
You can use the procedure below to display a screen that shows  
12 images.  
Using the Calendar Screen  
Use the following procedure to display a calendar, which shows  
the first image recorded on each date of a particular month. This  
screen helps to make searching for an image quicker and  
easier.  
1. Press the zoom button  
Selection Boundary  
(
).  
1. In the PLAY mode,  
This displays the 12-image  
screen with a selection  
boundary around the last  
image that was on the  
monitor screen.  
press the zoom button  
(
) twice.  
This displays the calendar  
screen.  
You can also display the  
calendar by pressing  
[MENU], selecting the  
“PLAY” tab, selecting  
“Calendar”, and then  
pressing [X] to display the  
calendar.  
2. Select the image you want.  
Year/Month  
Selection Boundary  
Use [W] and [X] to scroll between 12-image screens.  
To view the full-screen version of a particular image, use  
[S], [T], [W], and [X] to move the selection boundary to it  
and then press [SET].  
To exit the calendar screen, press [MENU] or [BS].  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
       
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to move the  
selection boundary to the date whose image  
you want to view and then press [SET].  
This will display the first image recorded on that date.  
IMPORTANT!  
Note following points about how certain editing functions of  
the camera affect the date with which the image is  
associated on the calendar screen.  
Performing this type of  
editing operation:  
Will associate the resulting  
image with this date:  
NOTE  
The year and month on the calendar is displayed using the  
same format as you selected for the “Date Style” setting  
Keystone, Color  
(page 203).  
Correction, Resize,  
Trimming, Copy, Layout  
Print, MOTION PRINT  
The date that the editing  
operation was performed  
Editing the date and time The date that the original  
of an image  
image was recorded  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
To stop Image Roulette  
Using Image Roulette  
Press [  
] (REC) to enter the REC mode or press [ON/OFF] to  
Image Roulette scrolls through images on the monitor screen,  
finally stopping randomly at a final image. It puts some fun into  
image viewing that you can use for game playing, to award  
prices, for fortunetelling, and just about anything else you can  
imagine.  
turn off the camera.  
The camera will exit Image Roulette automatically you do not  
perform the next Image Roulette operation within about one  
minute after the final image of the previous operation  
appeared on the monitor screen.  
1. While the camera is turned off, hold down [W]  
IMPORTANT!  
and [  
] (PLAY).  
Image Roulette does not play audio or movie files.  
For a rotated snapshot (page 175), the Image Roulette  
screen shows the unrotated version of the image.  
Note that Image Roulette works only with images shot with  
this camera. Image Roulette may not operate properly  
when other types of images are in memory.  
Keep the buttons depressed until an image appears on  
the display.  
2. Release the buttons when Image Roulette  
starts.  
The screen will scroll through images and finally stop at  
one of them.  
You can use Image Roulette only when “[  
] and [  
]”  
are configured for “Power On” or “Power On/Off” (page  
208).  
To perform another Image Roulette operation  
Press [W] or [X].  
VIEWING SNAPSHOTS AND MOVIES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
 
EDITING IMAGES  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select an image size, and  
Resizing a Snapshot  
You can reduce the size of a snapshot and save the result as a  
separate snapshot. The original snapshot is also retained. You  
can resize a snapshot to any one of the following sizes.  
then press [SET].  
When you select an image size, it will start to cycle  
through the following information:  
Image Size  
Number of Pixels  
Print Size  
.
The print size indicates the optimum paper size for  
printing a snapshot of the selected image size.  
Image Size (Pixels)  
Print Size  
6M* 2816 × 2112 A3 Print  
4M 2304 × 1728 A4 Print  
Larger  
5. After you press [SET] in step 4 to resize the  
image, the monitor screen returns to step 3.  
From there you can repeat steps 3 and 4 to  
resize another image if you want.  
E-Mail  
VGA 640 × 480 Optimum size for an image  
to be attached to e-mail.  
Smaller  
To exit the resize operation, select “Cancel”.  
* M stands for “Mega”, which means “million”.  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Resize” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [W] and [X] to scroll through images and  
display the one you want to resize.  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
   
IMPORTANT!  
Cropping a Snapshot  
You cannot resize a VGA (640 × 480 pixels) size image.  
Resizing a snapshot shot with an aspect ratio of 16:9 or 3:2  
will cause the left and right sides of the image to be cut off.  
The aspect ratio of the resulting image will be 4:3.  
The recording date of the resized version of the snapshot  
will be the same as the recording date of the original  
snapshot.  
You can crop a snapshot to trim parts you do not need, and save  
the result in a separate file. The original snapshot is also  
retained.  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the snapshot you  
want to crop.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab,  
Zoom Factor  
select “Trimming” and  
then press [X].  
Represents Snapshot  
Area  
This operation can be  
performed only while a  
snapshot is on the monitor  
screen.  
Part of image that is  
currently displayed.  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
 
4. Use the zoom button to zoom, and [S], [T],  
[W], and [X] to move around the zoomed  
image to display the part you want to extract.  
Keystone Correction  
Use the following procedure to correct the snapshot of a  
blackboard, document, poster, photograph, or other rectangular  
object that is out of square because it was recorded at an angle.  
Performing keystone correction on an image causes a new  
(corrected) 2M (1600 × 1200 pixels) size image to be stored as a  
separate file.  
5. Press [SET] to extract the displayed part and  
save it as a separate file.  
To exit the cropping procedure at any time before you  
press [SET], press [MENU].  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the snapshot you  
want to correct.  
IMPORTANT!  
The image produced by cropping a 3:2 or 16:9 image will  
have an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
The recording date of the extracted image will be the same  
as the recording date of the original snapshot.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Keystone” and  
then press [X].  
This displays screen that shows all of the rectangular  
shapes in the image that qualify as candidates for keystone  
correction.  
Note that the above step is possible only when there is a  
snapshot displayed on the monitor screen.  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
 
4. Use [W] and [X] to  
select the candidate  
you want to correct.  
Using Color Restoration to Correct the  
Color of an Old Photograph  
Color restoration let you correct the old color of a photograph  
shot with a digital camera. This function is useful for correcting  
existing old photographs, posters, etc.  
Performing color restoration on an image causes a new  
(restored) 2M (1600 × 1200 pixels) size image to be stored as  
a separate file.  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Correct” and then  
press [SET].  
Select “Cancel” to exit the procedure without performing  
keystone correction.  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the snapshot you  
want to correct.  
IMPORTANT!  
If the original image is smaller than 2M (1600 × 1200  
pixels) size, the new (corrected) version will be the same  
size as the original one.  
When you display a corrected image on the camera’s  
monitor screen, the date and time indicate when the image  
was originally recorded, not when the image was corrected.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Color Correction”  
and then press [X].  
4. Use [W] and [X] to select the photograph  
candidate you want.  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Trim”, and then  
press [SET].  
This displays a cropping boundary on the monitor screen.  
To exit color restoration without storing anything, select  
“Cancel”.  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
 
6. Press the zoom button to zoom the cropping  
IMPORTANT!  
boundary.  
If the original image is smaller than 2M (1600 × 1200  
pixels) size, the new (restored) version will be the same  
size as the original one.  
When you display a restored image on the camera’s  
monitor screen, the date and time indicate when the image  
was originally recorded, not when the image was corrected.  
7. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to move the  
selection boundary to the desired location and  
then press [SET].  
The camera will correct color automatically and save the  
corrected image.  
If you do not want a border around the resulting image,  
select and area that is smaller than the original image.  
To exit color restoration without saving anything, press  
[MENU].  
NOTE  
If you want to record the image of an old photograph with  
this camera and restore the resulting image, see “Restoring  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
5. When all the settings are the way you want,  
press [SET] to apply them.  
Editing the Date and Time of an Image  
Use the procedure in this section to change the date and time of  
a previously recorded image.  
After editing the time and date, display the image to  
confirm that the date and time are correct.  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to display  
the image whose date and time you want to  
edit.  
IMPORTANT!  
The date and time stamped into an image using the Time  
Stamp feature cannot be edited (page 141).  
You cannot edit the date and time of an image that is  
protected. Unprotect the image and then edit the date and  
time.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Date/Time” and  
then press [X].  
You can specify any date in the range of January 1, 1980 to  
December 31, 2049.  
4. Set the date and the time you want.  
To do this:  
Do this:  
Change the value at the cursor  
location  
Press [S] or [T].  
Press [W] or [X].  
Press [BS].  
Move the cursor between settings  
Toggle between 12-hour and 24-  
hour timekeeping  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
 
IMPORTANT!  
Rotating an Image  
You cannot rotate an image that is protected. To rotate a  
protected snapshot, first remove its protection (page 190).  
Zoomed images cannot be rotated.  
The original (unrotated) version of a snapshot’s image will  
be displayed on the 12-image screen and the calendar  
screen.  
Movies can be rotated on the camera’s monitor screen  
only. The movie is not rotated when played on a computer  
screen.  
Perform the following procedure to rotate the image (snapshot or  
movie) currently on the monitor screen. This feature comes in  
handy with a snapshot that you shot using portrait (vertical)  
orientation. After rotating a snapshot, you can return it to its  
original orientation, if you want.  
Note that this procedure does not actually change the image  
data. It simply alters how the snapshot is displayed on the  
camera’s monitor screen.  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Rotation” and then  
press [X].  
This operation can be performed only while a snapshot or  
movie image is on the monitor screen.  
3. Use [W] and [X] to select the snapshot whose  
display image you want to rotate.  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Rotate” and then  
press [SET].  
Each press of [SET] will rotate the displayed image 90  
degrees left.  
5. When the displayed image is at the orientation  
you want, press [MENU].  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
 
3. On the “PLAY” tab,  
select “Layout Print”,  
and then press [X].  
This operation can be  
performed only while a  
snapshot is on the monitor  
screen.  
Combining Multiple Snapshots into a  
Single Image (Layout Print)  
You can use the following procedure to insert snapshots into the  
frames of a layout and produce a new image that contains  
multiple snapshots.  
Layout pattern  
(Two Images)  
Layout pattern  
(Three Images)  
4. Use [W] and [X] to  
select the type of  
layout you want and  
then press [SET].  
5. Use [W] and [X] to select a background color.  
6. Press [SET].  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to select  
the first snapshot you want to include in the  
layout.  
2. Press [MENU].  
EDITING IMAGES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
 
7. Use [W] and [X] to select the snapshot for the  
Adjusting White Balance of a  
Recorded Image  
You can use the white balance setting to select a light source  
type for a recorded image, which will affect the colors of the  
image.  
layout and then press [SET].  
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all of the other frames  
in the layout.  
The final layout image will be saved after you insert the final  
snapshot into it.  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to display  
the image whose white balance setting you  
want to change.  
Pressing [MENU] returns to the PLAY mode screen  
without saving the layout image.  
You will not be able to save the new image unless there is  
a snapshot in all of the layout frames.  
2. Press [MENU].  
IMPORTANT!  
3. Select the “PLAY” tab, select “White Balance”,  
and then press [X].  
Layout Print is not supported when the image size is “3:2  
(3264 × 2176 pixels)” or “16:9 (3264 × 1840 pixels)”.  
When you display a layout image on the camera’s monitor  
screen, the date and time indicates when the last image  
added to the layout was originally recorded, not when the  
image was laid out.  
Note that the above step is possible only when there is a  
snapshot displayed on the monitor screen.  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select a white balance  
setting, and then press [SET] to apply it.  
The size of the multi-snapshot image for this operation is  
fixed automatically at 7M (3072 × 2304 pixels).  
When you want the image to appear  
Select this  
like it was recorded under these  
setting:  
conditions:  
Outdoors, fair weather  
(Daylight)  
Outdoors, cloudy to rain, in tree shade,  
etc.  
(Overcast)  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
 
In a location where color temperature is  
very high, like in the shade of a  
building, etc.  
IMPORTANT!  
(Shade)  
(Day  
White  
Fluorescent)  
Adjusting the white balance of an image creates a new  
image with the new white balance setting. The original  
image also remains in memory.  
When you display an image whose white balance has been  
adjusted on the camera’s monitor screen, the date and time  
indicates when the image was originally recorded, not  
when the white balance was adjusted.  
Under white or daylight white  
fluorescent lighting, without  
suppressing color cast  
N
Under daylight fluorescent lighting,  
while suppressing color cast  
(Daylight  
Fluorescent)  
D
Under incandescent lighting, while  
suppressing color cast  
(Tungsten)  
Cancel  
Adjusting Image Brightness  
Use the following procedure to adjust the brightness of  
Cancel white balance adjustment  
snapshots.  
Normally, the initially selected white balance setting on  
the above menu is the one that was used when you  
originally recorded the image. If you used the “Auto” or  
“Manual” white balance setting when you recorded the  
image, “Cancel” will be selected (page 132).  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the one whose  
brightness you want to adjust.  
If you select the same white balance setting as the one  
you selected when you originally recorded the image,  
pressing [SET] will exit the white balance adjustment  
menu without changing the image.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. Select the “PLAY” tab, select “Brightness”,  
and then press [X].  
Note that the above step is possible only when there is a  
snapshot displayed on the monitor screen.  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
 
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want,  
Reducing the Effects of  
Underexposure  
and then press [SET].  
To get this:  
Select this setting:  
You can use the following procedure to reduce underexposure  
+2  
+1  
0
only, while maintaining the bright areas of an image.  
Brighter  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to select  
the image you want to correct.  
–1  
–2  
Darker  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Dynamic Range”,  
and then press [X].  
To cancel the brightness adjustment operation, press [W]  
or [MENU].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
IMPORTANT!  
and then press [SET].  
Adjusting the brightness of an image creates a new image  
with the new brightness level. The original image also  
remains in memory.  
When you display a brightness adjusted image on the  
camera’s monitor screen, the date and time indicates when  
the image was originally recorded, not when the brightness  
was adjusted.  
When you want to do this:  
Select this setting:  
Expand +2  
Apply Dynamic Range to a  
greater extent than “Expand +1”  
Reduce underexposure  
Expand +1  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
 
IMPORTANT!  
IMPORTANT!  
Performing Dynamic Range correction on an image causes  
the new (corrected) version to be stored as a separate file.  
When you edit a movie, only the result is saved. The  
original movie is not retained. Once you perform an editing  
operation, you will not be able to undo it.  
When you display a corrected image on the camera’s  
monitor screen, the date and time indicates when the  
image was originally recorded, not when the image was  
corrected.  
A movie that is shorter than five seconds cannot be edited.  
The movie editing operation is supported only for movies  
that were recorded with this camera.  
You will not be able to edit a movie if the amount of  
remaining memory capacity is less than the size of the  
movie file you want to edit. If there is not enough memory  
available, delete any files you no longer need to free up  
more.  
Editing a Movie on the Camera  
You can perform the following cut operations on the camera to  
edit movies you have recorded.  
Cutting a movie into two parts or splicing of two movies in  
to a single movie cannot be performed on the camera.  
Operation  
Cut  
Description  
Cuts everything from the current  
1. Play back the movie you want to edit.  
(To-Point Cut)  
location to the beginning of the movie.  
Cut  
2. Press [SET] to pause  
playback.  
Cuts everything between two points.  
(Point-To-Point Cut)  
Cut  
Cuts everything from the current  
location to the end of the movie.  
Check to make sure that  
(From-Point Cut)  
” (cut icon) is  
displayed on the monitor  
screen. If it isn’t, press  
[SET] again.  
Cut icon  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
 
3. Press [T].  
5. Select the frame  
(point) where you  
You could also perform the following steps in place of  
steps 1 through 3 above.  
want to cut the movie.  
In the PLAY mode, select the movie you want to edit  
1
and then press [MENU].  
On the “PLAY” tab, select “Movie Editing” and then  
press [X].  
2
Cut range (red)  
Press this button:  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the cut operation  
and then press [SET].  
To do this:  
To cancel movie editing, select “Cancel” and then press  
[SET]. This will return to the paused movie playback  
screen.  
Fast forward or fast reverse  
playback  
[X] or [W]  
[SET]  
Pause or unpause movie playback  
Scroll paused playback one frame  
forward or back  
[X] or [W]  
To cancel the cut operation, press [MENU]. This will  
return to the screen in step 3.  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
6. Press [T] to perform the required cut  
Creating a Snapshot of a Movie Frame  
(MOTION PRINT)  
MOTION PRINT lets you capture a movie frame and use it to  
create a snapshot. The snapshot you create can be either of the  
two formats described below.  
operation(s).  
For this type of cut  
Do this:  
operation:  
Cut  
Select the point up to which you  
want to cut and then press [T].  
(To-Point Cut)  
9-frame  
This format puts the  
Cut  
Select the point from which you  
want to cut and then press [T].  
Snapshot selected movie frame  
in the center, the four  
frames that precede it  
along top and the four  
frames that follow it  
(From-Point Cut)  
1.Select the start point of the center  
segment and then press [T].  
Cut  
(Point-To-Point Cut) 2.Select the end point of the center  
segment and then press [T].  
along the bottom.  
1-frame  
This format creates a  
7. In response to the confirmation message that  
appears, use [S] and [T] to select “Yes” and  
then press [SET].  
Snapshot snapshot using the  
selected movie frame  
only.  
To cancel movie editing, select “No” instead of “Yes” and  
then press [SET]. This will return to the paused movie  
playback screen.  
The selected cut operation will take considerable time to  
complete. Wait until the “Busy... Please wait...” message  
disappears from the monitor screen before performing  
any operation on the camera. Note that a cut operation  
can take a very long time if the movie being edited is long.  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
   
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the movie that  
contains the frame you want to use.  
IMPORTANT!  
MOTION PRINT is not possible using a movie that was  
recorded on a different type of camera.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “MOTION PRINT”,  
and then press [X].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select either “9 frames” or  
“1 frame”.  
5. Use [W] and [X] to scroll through the movie  
frames and search for the one you want to use  
as the image of the snapshot.  
Holding down [W] or [X] scrolls at high speed.  
6. After displaying the movie frame you want,  
press [SET].  
If you selected “9 frames” in step 4, the camera will create  
a 9-frame snapshot with the frame you selected in step 6  
in the center.  
If you selected “1 frame” in step 4, the camera will create  
a snapshot of the frame you selected in step 6.  
EDITING IMAGES  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
USING AUDIO  
4. Press the shutter button to start audio  
Adding Audio to a Snapshot  
The dubbing feature of your camera lets you add audio to a  
snapshot after you shoot it. A snapshot that includes audio  
(regardless of whether the audio was recorded on the spot or  
recording.  
5. Press the shutter button again to stop audio  
recording.  
added later) is indicated by the “  
” icon.  
Recording will stop automatically after about 30 seconds if  
You can re-record a snapshot’s audio whenever you want.  
You can record up to about 30 seconds of audio for a snapshot.  
you do not press the shutter button.  
To play back snapshot audio  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the snapshot to  
which you want to add audio.  
Perform the steps under “Listening to the Audio of an Audio  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab,  
select “Dubbing” and  
then press [X].  
This operation can be  
performed only while a  
snapshot is on the monitor  
screen.  
USING AUDIO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
     
5. Press the shutter button to start audio  
Re-recording Snapshot Audio  
recording.  
IMPORTANT!  
This deletes the previous recording and replaces it with the  
Note that you cannot restore the original audio once you  
delete or re-record the audio of a snapshot.  
new one.  
6. Press the shutter button again to stop audio  
recording.  
1. In the PLAY mode, use [W] and [X] to scroll  
through images and display the snapshot  
whose audio you want to re-record.  
Recording will stop automatically after about 30 seconds if  
you do not press the shutter button.  
2. Press [MENU].  
NOTE  
Your camera supports the following audio data formats.  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Dubbing” and then  
press [X].  
– Audio Format: WAVE/ADPCM (.WAV extension)  
– Approximate Audio File Size: 165 KB (30-second  
recording at 5.5 KB per second)  
See page 86 for recording precautions.  
Adding audio (dubbing) is not possible for the following  
types of images.  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Delete” and then  
press [SET].  
If you just want to delete the audio of the snapshot  
without re-recording anything, press [MENU] here and  
skip the rest of this procedure.  
– Images created using MOTION PRINT  
– Protected images  
USING AUDIO  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
3. Press the shutter button to start recording.  
The operation lamp flashes green while recording is in  
progress.  
Recording Audio Only (Voice  
Recording)  
Voice Recording lets you record audio only, without a snapshot  
or movie.  
Using built-in memory only, you get up to about 33 minutes,  
43 seconds of Voice Recording.  
Pressing [SET] during recording will insert a marker into  
the recording. During later playback, you will be able to  
jump to the markers in the recording.  
4. Press the shutter button again to stop audio  
recording and return to the screen in step 3.  
Recording also will stop automatically if memory  
becomes full.  
1. In the REC mode, press [BS].  
2. Use [S], [T], [W], and  
[X] to select “Voice  
Recording” and then  
press [SET].  
Recording Time  
5. Now you can repeat steps 3 and 4 to record  
more, or you can exit this procedure by  
pressing [BS] and selecting another BEST  
SHOT scene.  
This causes “  
” to appear  
on the monitor screen.  
When exiting this procedure, select “Auto” for normal image  
recording.  
Remaining Recording  
Time  
USING AUDIO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
 
Playing Back Voice Recording Data  
NOTE  
You can also play back Voice Recording data on your  
1. Enter the PLAY mode, and then use [W] and  
[X] to display the Voice Recording file you  
want to play.  
computer using QuickTime.  
Your camera supports the following audio data formats.  
– Audio Data: WAVE/ADPCM (.WAV extension)  
– Approximate Audio File Size: 165 KB (30-second  
recording at 5.5 KB per second)  
” is displayed in place of an image for a Voice  
Recording file.  
See page 86 for recording precautions.  
2. Press [SET] to start  
playback.  
USING AUDIO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
Voice Recording Playback Controls  
To do this:  
Do this:  
Hold down [X] or  
[W].  
Fast forward or fast reverse playback.  
Pause or restart playback  
Press [SET].  
Jump to a marker in the audio data while  
playback is paused.  
Press [X] or [W].  
Adjust volume  
You can adjust volume only while  
playback is in progress or paused.  
Use [S] and [T].  
Toggle on-screen indicators on or off  
Press [DISP].  
Stop playback  
Press [MENU].  
USING AUDIO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Files and Folders  
Your camera treats each snapshot, movie, and Voice Recording, as a separate file.  
You can delete, protect, and copy files as required.  
Files are grouped in folders that are created automatically by the camera.  
Files and folders have their own unique names, which are assigned automatically by the camera.  
For details about how folders are organized in memory, see “Memory Folder Structure” (page 253).  
Name and Maximum Number Allowed  
Example  
File  
Each folder can contain up to 9999 files named CIMG0001 through CIMG9999. The  
extension on the file name depends on the file type.  
If a folder already contains 9999 files, recording another file will cause a new folder to  
be created automatically.  
26th file name:  
CIMG0026.JPG  
Serial number  
(4 digits)  
Extension  
Folders Folders are named from 100CASIO* to 999CASIO*  
There can be up to 900 folders.  
100th folder name:  
*
100CASIO  
* The BEST SHOT mode (page 104) includes a sample scene that optimizes settings for  
auction site images. Depending on your camera model, the sample scene is named  
either “For eBay” or “Auction”.  
Serial number (3 digits)  
– Images recorded with the eBay scene are stored in a folder named “100_EBAY”.  
– Images recorded with the Auction scene are stored in a folder named “100_AUCT”.  
* The BEST SHOT mode (page 104) also has a scene (named “For YouTube”) that  
optimizes movie settings for YouTube. Images recorded with the YouTube scene are  
stored in a folder named “100YOUTB”.  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
     
Protecting a File Against Deletion  
You can protect an important file to ensure that it cannot be  
NOTE  
You can view folder and file names on your computer. For  
details about how file names are displayed on the camera’s  
monitor screen, see page 272.  
deleted accidentally.  
The total number of folders and files that is allowed  
depends on the image size and quality, and capacity of the  
memory card being used for storage.  
IMPORTANT!  
Note that even if a file is protected, it will be deleted if you  
perform the format operation (pages 14, 50, 209).  
Protecting a Specific File  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Protect” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [W] and [X] to scroll through images until  
the one you want to protect is on the monitor  
screen.  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
   
4. Use [S] and [T] to  
select “On” and then  
press [SET].  
Protecting All Files in Memory  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
An image that is protected is  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Protect” and then  
press [X].  
indicated by the “  
” icon.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “All Files : On” and  
then press [SET].  
5. Now you can repeat steps 3 and 4 to protect  
another image or exit this procedure by  
pressing [MENU].  
This protects all files currently in memory.  
4. Press [MENU].  
To unprotect a specific file  
To unprotect all files in memory  
Perform the procedure under “Protecting a Specific File”, but in  
Perform the procedure under “Protecting All Files in Memory”,  
but in step 3 select “All Files : Off” instead of “All Files : On”.  
step 4 select “Off” instead of “On”.  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Save”, and then  
press [SET].  
Using the FAVORITE Folder  
The FAVORITE folder is located in the camera’s built-in  
memory, and you can use it to store personal snapshots that you  
do not want displayed during normal PLAY mode operations.  
FAVORITE folder snapshots remain in camera memory, even if  
you change to a different memory card.  
This saves a copy of the snapshot to the FAVORITE folder.  
6. Now you can repeat steps 4 and 5 to save  
another image, or press [MENU] twice to exit  
this procedure.  
IMPORTANT!  
IMPORTANT!  
The FAVORITE folder can be used for snapshots only.  
Saving an audio snapshot in the FAVORITE folder will save  
the snapshot part only.  
The snapshot copied to the FAVORITE folder is converted  
to QVGA size (320 × 240 pixels). A snapshot in the  
FAVORITE folder cannot be restored to its original size.  
Snapshots in the FAVORITE folder cannot be copied to a  
memory card.  
Copying a File to the FAVORITE Folder  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
NOTE  
The number of snapshots that can be stored in the  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Favorites” and  
then press [X].  
FAVORITE folder depends on the image quality of each  
one, and how much built-in memory capacity is remaining.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Save” and then  
press [SET].  
4. Use [W] and [X] to select the snapshot you  
want to copy to the FAVORITE folder.  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
   
Perform the following steps to view FAVORITE folder  
contents on your computer.  
Viewing Snapshots in the FAVORITE Folder  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
1. Remove the memory card from the camera.  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Favorites” and  
then press [X].  
2. Place the camera on the USB cradle (which is  
connected to the computer).  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Show” and then  
3. Perform the required operations on your  
computer to navigate to the camera’s memory  
and display the FAVORITE folder contents.  
press [SET].  
4. Use [W] and [X] to  
File Name  
scroll through the  
snapshots in the  
FAVORITE folder.  
FAVORITE folder icon  
5. After you are finished viewing the FAVORITE  
folder snapshots, press [MENU] twice to exit  
this procedure.  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
Copying All Files in Built-in Memory to a  
Copying Files  
Memory Card  
Files can be copied from the camera’s built-in memory to a  
memory card, or from a memory card to built-in memory.  
This makes it possible, for example, to perform the following  
steps and copy a file from your memory card to another person’s  
memory card.  
The following operation copies all files from built-in memory to a  
memory card. You cannot copy files individually.  
1. Load the memory card to which you want to  
copy the files into the camera.  
Copy the file from your memory card to the camera’s built-in  
memory.  
Remove your memory card and insert the other person’s  
memory card.  
1
2
3
2. Turn on the camera, enter the PLAY mode and  
then press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Copy” and then  
press [X].  
Copy the file from built-in memory to the other memory card.  
IMPORTANT!  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Built-in  
Card”  
You can copy snapshots, movies, audio snapshots, or  
Voice Recording files you recorded with your camera.  
You cannot copy a snapshot that is in the FAVORITE  
folder.  
and then press [SET].  
This starts the copy operation. Wait until the “Busy... Please  
wait...” message disappears from the monitor screen before  
performing any operation on the camera.  
After the copy operation is complete, the last file copied  
will be displayed on the monitor screen.  
When a copied file image appears on the full-month  
calendar screen, it is displayed on the date that it was  
copied (page 166).  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
   
7. Now you can repeat steps 5 and 6 to copy  
another file, or you can exit this procedure by  
pressing [MENU].  
Copying a Single File from a Memory Card to  
Built-in Memory  
With this procedure, files must be copied one-by-one.  
1. Load the memory card that contains the file  
NOTE  
you want to copy into the camera.  
Files are copied to the folder in built-in memory whose  
name has the largest serial number.  
2. Turn on the camera, enter the PLAY mode and  
then press [MENU].  
3. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Copy” and then  
press [X].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Card  
Built-in”  
and then press [SET].  
5. Use [W] and [X] to select the file you want to  
copy.  
6. Use [S] and [T] to select “Copy” and then  
press [SET].  
This starts the copy operation. Wait until the “Busy... Please  
wait...” message disappears from the monitor screen before  
performing any operation on the camera.  
The copied image reappears on the monitor screen after  
the copy operation is complete.  
MANAGING YOUR FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
DELETING FILES  
You can delete files you no longer need, or after you transfer  
them to your computer’s hard disk or print them. This frees up  
memory for new files.  
You can delete one specific file, or you can delete all files  
currently in memory.  
Deleting a Specific File  
1. In the PLAY mode,  
press [T] (  
).  
Here we will explain the different file delete procedures,  
including how to delete snapshots from the FAVORITE folders.  
IMPORTANT!  
2. Use [W] and [X] to scroll through the images  
until the one for the file you want to delete is  
on the monitor screen.  
Remember that a file delete operation cannot be undone.  
Always make sure that you really no longer need a file  
before deleting it.  
A protected file cannot be deleted. To delete a protected  
file, first remove its protection (page 190).  
Deleting an audio snapshot deletes both the snapshot and  
the audio file.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Delete” and then  
press [SET].  
To exit the delete operation without deleting anything,  
select “Cancel”.  
4. Now you can repeat steps 2 and 3 to delete  
another file.  
You can exit this procedure by pressing [MENU].  
DELETING FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
       
Deleting All Files  
Deleting FAVORITE Folder Snapshots  
You can delete a single snapshot, or you can delete all the  
snapshots currently in the FAVORITE folder.  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [T] (  
).  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select “All Files Delete”  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
and then press [SET].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “Favorites” and  
then press [X].  
3. In response to the confirmation message that  
appears, use [S] and [T] to select “Yes”.  
To cancel the delete operation, select “No” instead of  
“Yes”.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Show” and then  
press [SET].  
4. Press [SET].  
4. Press [T] (  
).  
This deletes all of the files and displays the message  
“There are no files.”  
5. Use the procedures under “Deleting a Specific  
File” and “Deleting All Files” to delete the  
snapshots you want.  
You can exit this procedure by pressing [MENU] twice.  
DELETING FILES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
     
OTHER SETTINGS  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
Configuring Camera Sound Settings  
Your camera lets you configure the following sound settings.  
Type of sound and volume for shutter release and other  
operations  
and then press [SET].  
To do this:  
Select this setting:  
Sound 1 - 5  
Off  
Sound one of the built-in sounds  
(1 through 5)  
Volume level for movie and Voice Recording playback  
Turn sound off  
Selecting the Operation Sound  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Sounds” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the operation whose  
sound you want to configure (Startup, Half  
Shutter, Shutter, Operation) and then press  
[X].  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
   
Setting the Operation Tone Volume Level  
1. Press [MENU].  
Setting the Playback Volume Level  
You can use this procedure to set the playback volume level for  
movies and audio snapshots, independent of the operation tone  
volume.  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Sounds” and then  
press [X].  
1. Press [MENU].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “  
Operation”.  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Sounds” and then  
press [X].  
4. Use [W] and [X] to specify the playback  
volume setting you want and then press [SET].  
You can set the volume to one of eight levels in the range  
of 0 (lowest) to 7 (highest).  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “  
Play”.  
4. Use [W] and [X] to specify the operation tone  
volume setting you want and then press [SET].  
You can set the volume to one of eight levels in the range  
of 0 (lowest) to 7 (highest).  
Setting a volume level of 0 mutes the sound.  
NOTE  
The volume setting you configure here is also applied to  
Setting a volume level of 0 mutes the sound.  
video output (page 162).  
IMPORTANT!  
The volume setting you configure here does not affect the  
video output (page 162).  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
Turning the Startup Screen On or Off  
You can configure the camera to display a startup screen of an  
NOTE  
The following are the types of images that you can select  
for the startup screen.  
image you recorded, whenever you turn it on.  
– Special startup screen images built into the camera  
– Snapshots  
Even if you configure startup screen settings in the PLAY  
mode, the startup screen does not appear when turn on the  
– Audio snapshots (Audio does not play.)  
Only one startup screen image can be in effect at any time.  
To change the startup screen to another image, simply  
overwrite the current image with the new one.  
Formatting built-in memory (page 209) will delete the  
current startup screen image.  
camera by pressing [  
] (PLAY).  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Startup” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [W] and [X] to scroll through the images  
until the one you want to use as the startup  
screen is on the monitor screen.  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
To do this:  
Select this setting:  
Use the selected image as the  
startup screen  
On  
Off  
Turn off the startup screen  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
 
Select this  
setting:  
Specifying the File Name Serial  
Number Generation Rule  
Use the following procedure to specify the rule that governs  
generation of the serial number used in file names (page 189).  
To have the camera do this:  
Remember the numbers used for files. Files  
will be named using the next sequential  
number, even if files are deleted or if a blank  
memory card is loaded.  
If a memory card is loaded that already has  
files stored on it and the largest sequential  
number in the existing file names is greater  
than the largest sequential number  
remembered by the camera, numbering of  
new files will start from the largest  
sequential number in the existing file names  
plus 1.  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “File No.” and then  
press [X].  
Continue  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
Restart the serial number from 0001 whenever  
all files are deleted or when the memory card is  
replaced with a blank one.  
If a memory card is loaded that already has Reset  
files stored on it, numbering of new files will  
start from the largest sequential number in  
the existing file names number plus 1.  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
 
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Home” and then  
press [X].  
Changing the Camera Date and Time  
Setting  
When changing the date and time setting, be sure to do so for  
your Home City (the location where you normally use the  
camera). If you already have your Home City setting configured  
correctly, you can use the procedure under “Setting the Date  
and Time for Your Home City” (page 203) to change the current  
time setting only, if you want.  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “City” and then  
press [X].  
5. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the area  
where your Home City is located and then  
press [SET].  
6. Use [S] and [T] to select your home city and  
IMPORTANT!  
then press [SET].  
Changing the time and date setting without correctly  
configuring your Home City setting first will cause all of the  
World Time (page 204) dates and times to be off.  
7. After the setting is the way you want, press  
[SET] to exit the setting screen.  
Selecting Your Home City  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “World Time” and  
then press [X].  
This displays the current World Time settings.  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
   
Setting the Date and Time for Your Home  
Changing the Date Format  
You can select from among three different formats for the date.  
City  
1. Press [MENU].  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Adjust” and then  
press [X].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Date Style” and  
then press [X].  
3. Set the date and the time.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
To do this:  
Do this:  
Example: December 19, 2007  
Move the cursor between settings  
Press [W] or [X]  
To display the date like this:  
Select this format:  
YY/MM/DD  
Change the setting at the cursor  
location  
Press [S] or [T]  
07/12/19  
19/12/07  
12/19/07  
Toggle between 12-hour and 24-hour  
format  
DD/MM/YY  
Press [BS]  
MM/DD/YY  
4. After all of the settings are the way you want,  
press [SET] to exit the setting screen.  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
     
Using World Time  
NOTE  
This setting also affects the Operation Panel date format as  
You can use the World Time screen to view the current time in  
zone that is different from your Home City when you go on a trip,  
etc. World Time displays the current time in 162 cities in 32 time  
zones around the globe.  
shown below (page 55).  
When this date format setting The Operation Panel  
is selected:  
date appears as:  
YY/MM/DD or MM/DD/YY  
DD/MM/YY  
MM/DD  
Configuring World Time Settings  
DD/MM  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “World Time” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “World” and then  
press [X].  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
   
4. Use [S] and [T] to  
select “City” and then  
press [X].  
Switching between the Home Time and  
World Time Screens  
1. Press [MENU].  
To configure the summer  
time setting, use [S] and  
[T] to select “DST” and  
then select “On”.  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “World Time” and  
then press [X].  
Summer time is used in some areas to advance the  
current time setting by one hour during the summer  
months.  
Use of summer time depends on the local customs and  
laws.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “World” for the  
World Time screen, or “Home” for the Home  
Time screen.  
4. After selecting the screen you want, press  
[SET] to exit the setting screen.  
5. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the area  
where the city you want to view is located and  
then press [SET].  
6. Use [S] and [T] to select the city you want  
and then press [SET].  
7. After the setting is the way you want, press  
[SET] to exit the setting screen.  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
If the display contents are in the wrong  
Changing the Display Language  
You can use the procedure below to select a display text  
language  
language.  
1
The number and types of languages depend on the  
geographic area where the camera was marketed.  
23  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Language” and  
then press [X].  
: Select this tab.  
1
2
3
: Select the “Language” item.  
3. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to select the setting  
: Select the language you want.  
you want and then press [SET].  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
   
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
Changing the USB Port Protocol  
and then press [SET].  
You can use the procedure below to change the USB  
communication protocol that is used when exchanging data with  
a computer, printer, or other external device. Select the protocol  
that suits the device to which you are connecting.  
When you want to connect to this type Select this  
of device:  
setting:  
Computer or a printer that supports USB  
DIRECT-PRINT (page 212)  
1. Press [MENU].  
With this setting, the computer sees the  
camera as an external storage device.  
Use this setting for normal transfer of  
images from the camera to a computer  
(using the bundled Photo Loader with  
HOT ALBUM application).  
Mass Storage  
(USB DIRECT-  
PRINT)  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “USB” and then  
press [X].  
Printer that supports PictBridge (page  
PTP  
This setting simplifies the transfer of  
image data to the connected device.  
(PictBridge)  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
   
[
] (REC) and [ ] (PLAY) Button  
NOTE  
With “Power On/Off”, the camera turns off when you press  
] (REC) in the REC mode or [ ] (PLAY) in the PLAY  
mode.  
The initial factory default for this setting is “Power On”.  
Change this setting to anything besides “Disable” before  
connecting to a TV for image viewing.  
Settings  
[
You configure the camera so it does not turn on when you press  
the [  
press the [  
] (REC) or [  
] (PLAY) button, or to turn off when you  
] (REC) or [ ] (PLAY) button.  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “REC/PLAY” and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you want  
and then press [SET].  
To configure both keys to do  
Select this setting:  
this when pressed:  
Turn on the camera  
Power On  
Power On/Off  
Disable  
Turn on or turn off the camera  
Do not turn on the camera  
OTHER SETTINGS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
   
1. Check to make sure there is no memory card  
loaded in the camera.  
Formatting Built-in Memory  
Formatting built-in memory deletes any data stored in it.  
If there is a memory card loaded in the camera, remove it.  
IMPORTANT!  
2. Press [MENU].  
Note that data deleted by a format operation cannot be  
recovered. Check to make sure you do not need any of the  
data in built-in memory before you format it.  
Formatting built-in memory also deletes the following.  
– Face Recognition data saved with Record Family  
– Protected images  
3. On the “Set Up” tab, select “Format” and then  
press [X].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Format” and then  
press [SET].  
This formats built-in memory.  
– FAVORITE folder images  
To exit the format operation without formatting, select  
“Cancel”.  
– BEST SHOT mode user setups  
– Startup screen  
Entering the PLAY mode after formatting the built-in  
memory will cause the message “There are no files.” to  
appear.  
Make sure that the battery is charged fully before starting a  
formatting operation. Formatting may not be performed  
correctly and the camera may stop operating normally if the  
camera powers down while formatting is in progress.  
Never open the battery cover while formatting is in  
progress. Doing so can cause the camera to stop operating  
normally.  
OTHER SETTINGS  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
   
PRINTING  
Types of Printing  
There are three different methods you can use for printing images.  
Professional  
Print Service  
Take the memory card that contains the images you want to print to a  
professional print service.  
You can use DPOF settings to specify which images you want to print, the  
number of copies, and date stamp settings before taking the card in for  
printing.  
Printing at  
Home  
Printing on a Printer (page 212)  
Print on a printer that supports PictBridge or USB DIRECT-PRINT, or on a  
printer equipped with a memory card slot.  
You can use DPOF settings to specify which images you want to print, the  
number of copies, and date stamp settings before printing.  
Printing with a Computer  
Windows Computer  
Install the software (Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM) that comes bundled  
with the camera.  
Macintosh  
After transferring the images to your Macintosh, use commercially available  
software to print.  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
   
Printing Precautions  
Using Professional Print Service  
See the documentation that comes with your printer for  
information about print quality and paper settings.  
Contact the manufacturer of your printer to find out if it  
supports PictBridge or USB DIRECT-PRINT, for new printer  
versions, etc.  
Never disconnect cables or perform any camera or USB  
cradle operation while printing is in progress. Doing so can  
cause a printer error.  
Take a memory card that contains the images you want to print  
to the professional print service. Before taking in a memory card,  
you can use the camera’s DPOF settings (page 215) to specify  
which images you want printed, the number of copies, and  
whether or not the images should include a date stamp.  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
 
Printing on a Printer that Supports  
Using Your Printer to Print Images  
If your printer is either of the types described below, you can use  
it to print without going through a computer.  
– Printer equipped with a card slot for the type of memory  
card you are using  
PictBridge or USB DIRECT-PRINT  
You can connect the camera directly to a PictBridge or USB  
DIRECT-PRINT compliant printer and print images without going  
through a computer.  
The camera’s USB cradle also allows easy connection to a  
printer. Before connecting to a printer via the USB cradle, be  
sure to perform the following procedure first.  
– Printer that support PictBridge or USB DIRECT-PRINT  
Printing on a Printer with a Memory Card  
Slot  
1. Press [MENU].  
Remove a memory card from the camera and insert it directly  
into the printer’s memory card slot. Depending on what type of  
printer you are using, it also may be able to read the settings  
(images to be printed, number of copies, date stamping) you  
configure with the camera’s DPOF settings (page 215). For  
details, see the user documentation that comes with your printer.  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “USB” and then  
press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting that suits  
your printer and then press [SET].  
For this type of printer:  
USB DIRECT-PRINT compatible Mass Storage  
PictBridge compatible PTP  
Select this setting:  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
       
4. Connect the USB cable that comes bundled  
with the camera to the USB cradle and your  
printer’s USB port.  
5. Turn off the camera and place it onto the USB  
cradle.  
6. Turn on the printer.  
Connector  
Mini-B  
USB Cable (Bundled)  
USB Port  
7. Load paper into the printer.  
8. Press the USB cradle’s  
[USB] button.  
Connector A  
This displays a print menu on  
the camera’s monitor screen.  
[
] (USB) Connector  
Also, connect the AC adaptor to the cradle and plug the  
adaptor into an electrical outlet.  
If you do not plan to use the AC adaptor, make sure that  
the camera’s battery is fully charged.  
Nothing appears on the camera’s monitor screen if the  
camera is on the USB cradle while the bundled AV cable  
is connected to the cradle. Be sure to disconnect the AV  
cable from the cradle if you want to use the camera’s  
monitor screen to view images.  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
 
9. Use [S] and [T] to select “Paper Size” and  
then press [X].  
11. Use [S] and [T] to specify the print option  
you want.  
If you want to print a specific image:  
10. Use [S] and [T] to select a paper size and  
then press [SET].  
Select “1 Image” and then press [SET]. After that, use [W]  
and [X] to display the image you want to print.  
If you want to print multiple images:  
Select “DPOF Printing” and then press [SET]. Next, use  
the DPOF settings (page 215) to specify the images you  
want to select.  
The following are the available paper sizes.  
3.5" × 5", 5" × 7", 4" × 6", A4, 8.5" × 11", By Printer  
Selecting “By Printer” prints using a paper size selected  
on the printer.  
Available paper settings depend on the connected  
printer. For full details, see the user documentation that  
comes with your printer.  
To toggle date stamping on  
and off, press [BS]. The  
date stamp will be printed  
when “On” is indicated on  
the monitor screen.  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
12. Use [S] and [T] to select “Print” and then  
press [SET].  
Using DPOF to Specify Images to be  
Printed and the Number of Copies  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) lets you specify  
which images you want to print, the number of  
copies, and whether date stamping is turned on or  
off. The settings you configure are recorded on the  
memory card. After configuring settings you can  
use the memory card to print on a home printer that supports  
DPOF or take the memory card to a professional print service.  
With DPOF, you can configure settings while viewing the actual  
images on the camera’s monitor screen, so there is no need to  
recall hard-to-remember files names, etc.  
Printing will start and the message “Busy... Please wait...”  
will appear on the monitor screen. The message will  
disappear after a short while, even though printing is still  
being performed. Pressing any camera button will cause the  
printing status message to re-appear.  
The print menu screen will re-appear when printing is  
complete.  
If you selected “1 Image” in step 11, you can repeat the  
procedure from step 11 to print other images, if you want.  
13. After you are finished printing, press the USB  
cradle’s [USB] button.  
IMPORTANT!  
This will turn off the camera.  
Some printers may ignore time stamp settings or may not  
support DPOF at all. Check the user documentation that  
comes with your printer for details.  
Certain print service providers may not support DPOF or  
may support different printing protocols. In this case, you  
will need to perform printing in accordance with the  
instructions provided by the print service you are using.  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
     
5. Use [S] and [T] to specify the number of  
copies.  
Configuring DPOF Settings Individually for  
Each Image  
You can specify up to 99 for the number of copies.  
Specify 0 if you do not want to print the image.  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab,  
select “DPOF Printing”  
and then press [X].  
6. If you want to include the date in the image,  
press [BS] to change the displayed date  
stamping setting to “On”.  
To turn off date stamping, press [BS] so “Off” is  
displayed.  
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to configure settings for other  
images, if you want.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Select images” and  
then press [X].  
7. After everything is the way you want, press  
4. Use [W] and [X] to scroll through the images  
until the one you want to print is on the  
monitor screen.  
[SET] to save the settings.  
PRINTING  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
Clear DPOF settings when you no longer need them!  
Configuring the Same DPOF Settings for All  
the Images  
DPOF settings are not cleared automatically after printing is  
complete. This means that if you perform another printing  
operation without clearing DPOF settings, printing will be  
performed in accordance with the last settings you configured. If  
you no longer need the currently configured DPOF settings, use  
All the Images” to change the number of copies setting for all the  
images to 00.  
1. In the PLAY mode, press [MENU].  
2. On the “PLAY” tab, select “DPOF Printing”  
and then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “All images” and  
then press [X].  
Tell your print service about your DPOF settings!  
4. Use [S] and [T] to specify the number of  
copies.  
If you take a memory card to a professional print service, be  
sure to tell them that it includes DPOF settings for the images to  
be printed and the number of copies. If you don’t, the print  
service may print all the images without regard to your DPOF  
settings, or they may ignore your date stamp setting.  
You can specify up to 99 for the number of copies.  
Specify 0 if you do not want to print.  
5. If you want to include the date in the images,  
press [BS] to change the displayed date  
stamping setting to “On”.  
To turn off date stamping, press [BS] so “Off” is  
displayed.  
6. After everything is the way you want, press  
[SET] to save the settings.  
PRINTING  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
 
You can insert dates using the bundled Photo Loader  
with HOT ALBUM (page 221) software (Windows only).  
Request date stamping when ordering prints from a  
professional print service  
– Some print services do not support date printing. Check  
with your service for more information.  
Date Stamping  
You can use any one of the following three methods to include  
the recording date in the printout of an image.  
Configure DPOF settings on the camera to specify date  
stamping (page 215)  
– If an image already has the date or time stamped into it  
using the camera’s Date Stamping feature, turning on  
DPOF date stamping will cause the two dates to be  
stamped in the same location. Be sure to turn off DPOF  
date stamping when printing an image that is stamped with  
the camera’s Date Stamping function.  
– Some printers may ignore time stamp settings or may not  
support DPOF at all. Check the user documentation that  
comes with your printer for details.  
– Note that some professional print services do not support  
DPOF printing. Check with your service before ordering  
prints.  
The camera’s Date Stamping feature stamps the date and  
time directly into the image data (page 141).  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
   
Exif Print  
Printing on a printer that also supports Exif  
Print (Exif 2.2) uses information about  
Supported Protocols  
Your camera supports the protocols described below.  
shooting conditions recorded with the image  
to enhance printed image quality.  
Contact your printer manufacturer for information about models  
that support Exif Print, printer upgrades, etc.  
PictBridge and USB DIRECT-PRINT  
PictBridge  
Camera and Imaging Products Association  
(CIPA)  
USB DIRECT-PRINT  
Seiko Epson Corporation  
PRINT Image Matching III  
Using image editing software and printing on a  
printer that also supports PRINT Image Matching  
III makes it possible to use information about  
shooting conditions that is recorded with the  
image, and produce exactly the type of image you  
want.  
PRINT Image Matching and PRINT Image Matching III are  
trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
PRINTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
 
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
On a Windows computer (only), you can  
transfer images from your computer to  
camera memory.  
You can even transfer images that were  
not originally recorded with the camera.  
You can capture (cut) a portion of the  
image (web page, map, etc.) currently on  
your computer screen and transfer it to  
camera memory.  
What you can do  
Connecting the camera to a computer with the bundled USB  
cable provides you with the capabilities described below.  
Transfer  
images to the  
camera  
View and  
You can use your computer to view camera  
store images* images and for long-term storage of images.  
You can manage, edit, and print images  
Manage, edit, stored on your computer.  
and print  
images  
Refer to the explanations later in this  
section and install the required software on  
your computers.  
Transfer  
You can transfer documents from your  
documents to computer to camera memory.  
the camera  
* You can also transfer images to a computer for viewing and  
storage without connecting the camera, by removing the  
memory card from the camera and reading the contents of the  
card with your computer (page 252).  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
   
The procedures you need to perform when using the camera  
with your computer and when using the bundled software are  
different for Windows and the Macintosh.  
Using the Camera with a Windows  
Computer  
Install the required software in accordance with what version of  
Windows you are running and what you want to do.  
Windows users should refer to “Using the Camera with a  
Macintosh users should refer to “Using the Camera with a  
Windows  
Version  
See  
page:  
Objective  
Install this software:  
Vista/XP/  
2000/Me  
IMPORTANT!  
Viewing  
(USB driver not required.)  
This camera supports USB 2.0 Hi-Speed protocol. Though  
it can be used with a computer that supports only USB 1.1  
protocol, higher speed data transfer becomes possible  
when USB 2.0 Hi-Speed is supported. Note that certain  
computer models, connecting through a USB hub, and  
other system conditions can slow down data transfer and  
even cause operational problems.  
images on  
a computer  
Storing  
images on  
a computer  
USB driver Type B  
You can download the  
USB driver from the  
official EXILIM Website at  
http://www.exilim.com/  
98SE/98  
Transfer of  
images from  
the camera  
and  
management  
of images on  
the computer  
Photo Loader with HOT  
ALBUM 3.1  
DirectX 9.0c (When DirectX  
9.0 or higher is not installed  
on the computer already.)  
Vista/XP/  
2000  
Play movies  
XP/2000  
QuickTime 7  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
     
Windows  
Version  
See  
page:  
Windows  
Version  
See  
page:  
Objective  
Install this software:  
Objective  
Install this software:  
Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD  
Adobe Reader 8  
(Not required if already  
installed.)  
Vista/XP/  
2000 (SP4)  
You also need to install  
DirectX, Microsoft  
Vista/XP/  
2000  
Windows Media Player,  
QuickTime 7, and Flash  
Player separately.  
If your computer does not  
already have Adobe  
Reader or Adobe Acrobat  
Reader installed, go to  
the Adobe Systems  
VideoStudio 10 Plus for  
CASIO (Trial Version)  
View the  
User’s Guide  
This is the Trial Version  
of the software, whose  
use is limited to 30 days  
following installation.  
You also need to install  
DirectX, Microsoft  
2000/Me/  
98SE/98  
Incorporated website to  
download and the  
version of Adobe Reader  
or Adobe Acrobat Reader  
that is compatible with  
your computer’s  
Edit movies  
XP/2000  
Windows Media Player,  
QuickTime 7, and Flash  
Player separately.  
operating system.  
Me/98SE/  
98  
Use commercial software  
as required.  
Upload movie Vista/  
YouTube Uploader for  
files to  
YouTube  
XP (SP2)/ CASIO  
2000 (SP4)  
Transfer  
Vista/XP/  
Photo Transport 1.0  
images to the 2000/Me/  
camera  
98SE/98  
Transfer  
documents to  
the camera  
CASIO DATA  
TRANSPORT 1.0  
Vista/XP/  
2000  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
Photo Transport 1.0  
Computer System Requirements for  
Bundled Software  
Memory : At least 64MB  
Computer system requirements are different for each of the  
applications. Be sure to check the requirements for the particular  
application you are trying to use. Note that the values provided  
here are minimum requirements for running each application.  
Actual requirements are greater, depending on the number of  
images and the sizes of the images being handled.  
HD  
: At least 2MB  
CASIO DATA TRANSPORT 1.0  
Sufficient memory to run the operating system  
Adobe Reader 8  
CPU  
: Pentium III Class Processor  
Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM 3.1  
Memory : At least 128MB  
HD : At least 2GB  
HD  
: At least 180MB  
Other : Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher  
DirectX 9.0 or higher  
Other  
: Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher  
Windows Media Player 9 or higher  
QuickTime 7 or higher  
QuickTime 7  
CPU  
: Pentium or higher  
Memory : At least 128MB  
DirectX 9.0c  
OS  
: Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 / XP  
HD : 65MB for installation (18MB on hard disk)  
YouTube Uploader for CASIO  
Sufficient memory to run the operating system  
Computer configuration that enables playback of movies on  
the YouTube site  
Computer configuration that enables upload of movies to the  
YouTube site  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
223  
Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD  
CPU : Intel Pentium 4, M, D, or Extreme Edition; or AMD  
Athlon 64 or higher  
Memory : 256MB of RAM (at least 512MB recommended)  
IMPORTANT!  
For details about the minimum system requirements for  
each software application, see the “Read me” files on the  
CD-ROM that comes bundled with the camera.  
HD  
: 250MB space available for program installation  
At least 4GB space available for video capture and  
editing  
Precautions for Windows Vista Users  
Photo Transport and CASIO DATA TRANSPORT will not run  
under Windows Vista 64bit Version.  
Photo Transport and CASIO DATA TRANSPORT can be  
used only by users logged in with Administrator privileges.  
Operation on a self-made computer or under a dual-processor  
environment is not supported.  
Other  
: 1024 × 768 or higher display resolution  
You also need to install DirectX, Microsoft Windows  
Media Player, QuickTime 7, and Flash Player  
separately.  
VideoStudio 10 Plus for CASIO (Trial Version)  
* 30-day trial version  
Operation may not be possible under certain computer  
environments.  
CPU  
: Intel Pentium 4, M, D, or Extreme Edition; or AMD  
Athlon 64 or higher  
Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM provides a function for  
migrating image data previously saved with Photo Loader,  
which means you still will have access to your existing image  
archives.  
Memory : 512MB of RAM (at least 1GB recommended)  
HD  
: 1GB space available for program installation  
At least 4GB space available for video capture and  
editing  
Other  
: 1024 × 768 or higher display resolution  
You also need to install DirectX, Microsoft Windows  
Media Player, QuickTime 7, and Flash Player  
separately.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
Viewing and Storing Images on a  
Computer  
You can view and store images (snapshot and movie files) on  
your computer by connecting to the camera via its USB cradle.  
You can connect the camera to your computer to view and store  
images (snapshot and movie files).  
If your computer is running Windows 98SE or 98, do not  
try to establish a connection between the camera and  
computer before installing the USB driver on the  
computer.  
If you do, the computer will not be able to recognize the  
camera.  
If your computer is running Windows 98SE or 98, be sure to  
install the USB driver.  
Do not connect the camera to your computer without installing  
the USB driver first.  
USB driver installation is not required in the case of Windows  
Vista, XP, 2000, and Me. Simply connect the camera to your  
computer.  
If your computer is running Windows 98SE or 98, you need to  
install the USB driver (page 221). You can download the USB  
driver from the official EXILIM Website at  
General Procedure  
http://www.exilim.com/  
1) Use the USB cradle to connect the camera and computer (page  
2) View and copy the images you want (page 229).  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
     
2. Connect the USB cable that comes bundled  
with the camera to the USB cradle and the  
USB port of your computer.  
Connecting the Camera to Your Computer  
the First Time  
IMPORTANT!  
USB Cable (Bundled)  
Connector  
If you are not using the AC adaptor to power the camera,  
the battery may go low and cause the camera to turn off  
while it is in the middle of exchanging files with your  
computer. Use of the special AC adaptor is recommended  
to power the camera.  
Mini-B  
USB Port  
Connector A  
1. Connect the bundled AC adaptor to the [DC IN  
5.3V] connector of the USB cradle and then  
plug it in to a household power outlet.  
[
] (USB) Connector  
Orient the USB plug so it correctly matches the shape of  
the USB port when you connect them.  
Plug the USB cable into the ports securely, as far as it will  
go. Proper operation is not possible if connections are not  
correct.  
If you do not plan to use the AC adaptor, make sure that  
the camera’s battery is fully charged.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
     
3. Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button to turn it  
on and then press [MENU].  
7. Press the USB cradle’s  
[USB] button.  
Do not place the camera on the USB cradle yet.  
4. On the “Set Up” tab, select “USB” and then  
press [X].  
[USB]  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Mass Storage” and  
USB Lamp  
then press [SET].  
6. Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button to turn it  
off and then place the camera on the USB  
cradle.  
Do not place the camera onto the USB cradle while it is  
turned on.  
If you plan to transfer images from the camera’s built-in  
memory to your computer, make sure there is no memory  
card loaded in the camera.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
   
Camera-Computer Connection  
IMPORTANT!  
Pressing the cradle’s [USB] button puts it into the USB mode,  
which is indicated by the USB lamp lighting green. In this mode,  
your computer recognizes the memory card loaded in the  
camera (or the camera’s built-in memory if it does not have a  
memory card loaded) as a removable disk.  
From now on, you will not have to perform steps 3 through 5 in  
the above procedure when you connect the camera to your  
computer (unless you change the camera’s USB settings for  
some reason).  
Never disconnect the USB cable or remove the camera  
from the USB cradle without exiting the USB mode first.  
Doing so can corrupt image data. See “Removing the  
Camera from the USB Cradle” on page 232 for the correct  
steps you need to perform to remove the camera from the  
cradle safely.  
With some Windows setups, you may see a guidance  
message appear on your display to let you know about the  
new removable disk. If this happens, simply close the  
guidance message dialog box.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
Connecting the Camera to Your Computer  
Viewing Camera Images on Your Computer  
After connecting the camera to your computer, you can view  
after the First Time  
Since you need to configure menu settings only the first time you  
connect the camera to your computer, later connections are  
much simpler.  
camera images on your computer screen.  
1. Windows XP users: Click “Start” and then “My  
Computer”.  
1. Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button to turn it  
off and then place the camera on the USB  
cradle.  
Windows Vista users: Click “Start” and then  
“Computer”.  
Windows 2000/Me/98SE/98 users: Double-  
click “My Computer”.  
2. Press the USB cradle’s  
[USB] button.  
2. Double-click “Removable Disk”.  
Your computer recognizes the memory card loaded in the  
camera (or built-in memory if there is no card) as a  
removable disk.  
Pressing the cradle’s [USB]  
button puts it into the USB  
mode, which is indicated by  
the USB lamp lighting  
3. Double-click the “DCIM” folder.  
green.  
[USB]  
4. Double-click the folder that contains the image  
you want to view.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
 
5. Double-click the file that contains the image  
you want to view.  
Saving an Image on Your Computer  
In order to work on an image or put it into an album, you must  
first save it to your computer. To save a camera image to your  
computer, you must first establish a connection between them  
via the camera’s USB cradle.  
This displays the image.  
For information about file names, see “Memory Folder  
Structure” on page 253.  
1. Windows XP users: Click “Start” and then “My  
Computer”.  
NOTE  
An image that was rotated on the camera will be displayed  
Windows Vista users: Click “Start” and then  
“Computer”.  
on your computer screen in its original (unrotated)  
orientation.  
Windows 2000/Me/98SE/98 users: Double-  
click “My Computer”.  
2. Double-click “Removable Disk”.  
Your computer recognizes the memory card loaded in the  
camera (or built-in memory if there is no card) as a  
removable disk.  
3. Right-click the “DCIM” folder.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
4. On the shortcut menu that appears, click  
IMPORTANT!  
“Copy”.  
Never use your computer to modify, delete, move, or  
rename any image files that are in the camera’s built-in  
memory or memory card. Doing so can cause problems  
with the camera’s image management data, which will  
make it impossible to play back images on the camera and  
can drastically alter remaining memory capacity. Whenever  
you want to modify, delete, move, or rename an image, do  
so only on images that are stored on your computer.  
Never unplug the USB cable, or operate the camera or  
cradle while viewing or storing images. Doing so can cause  
data to become corrupted.  
5. Windows XP users: Click “Start” and then “My  
Documents”.  
Windows Vista users: Click “Start” and then  
“Documents”.  
Windows 2000/Me/98SE/98 users: Double-  
click “My Documents” to open it.  
If you already have a “DCIM” folder in “My Documents”,  
the next step will overwrite it. If you want to keep the  
existing “DCIM” folder, you need to change its name or  
move it to a different location before performing the next  
step.  
6. On the “My Documents” “Edit” menu, select  
“Paste”.  
This will paste the “DCIM” folder (and all the image files it  
contains) into your “My Documents” folder. You now have a  
copy of the files that are in camera memory on your  
computer.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
Removing the Camera from the USB Cradle  
Transfer of Images from the Camera and  
Management of Images on the Computer  
Windows Vista/XP/98SE/98 Users  
To manage images on your computer, you need to install the  
Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM application from the CD-ROM  
that comes with the camera.  
Press the USB cradle [USB] button. After making sure that the  
cradle’s USB lamp is not lit, remove the camera from the cradle.  
Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM lets you import images from the  
camera to your computer automatically, to arrange images by  
recording date, and to display images in a calendar format.  
Windows 2000/Me Users  
Click card services in the task tray on your computer screen, and  
disable the drive number assigned to the camera. Next, press  
the USB cradle [USB] button. After making sure that the cradle’s  
USB lamp is not lit, remove the camera from the cradle.  
Installing Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “Photo Loader with HOT  
ALBUM” on its label.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
2. On the menu screen, click the “Language”  
down arrow button and then select the  
language you want.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
     
3. Click “Photo Loader with HOT ALBUM 3.1” to  
select it and then click “Read me”.  
“Read me” files contain important information about  
installation, including installation conditions and computer  
system requirements.  
1. On your computer, click “Start”, “All  
Programs”, “Accessories”, “System Tools”  
and then “System Information”.  
2. On the “Tools” menu, select “DirectX  
Diagnostic Tool”.  
4. Click “Install” for Photo Loader with HOT  
3. On the “System” tab, check to make sure that  
ALBUM.  
the “DirectX Version” is 9.0 or higher.  
5. Follow the instructions that appear on your  
computer screen to install Photo Loader with  
HOT ALBUM.  
4. Click “Exit” to exit the DirectX Diagnostic  
Tool.  
If your PC already has Microsoft DirectX 9.0 or higher  
installed, you do not need to install Microsoft DirectX 9.0c  
from the bundled CD-ROM.  
If your computer does not have Microsoft DirectX 9.0 or  
higher installed, install Microsoft DirectX 9.0c from the  
bundled CD-ROM.  
Checking Your Computer’s DirectX Version  
In order to manage images using Photo Loader with HOT  
ALBUM, your computer also needs to have Microsoft DirectX 9.0  
or higher installed. You can check the installed version of  
Microsoft DirectX using your PC’s DirectX Diagnostic Tool.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
3. Click “QuickTime 7” to select it and then click  
“Read me”.  
Playing Movies  
You can play back movies on a computer that  
has QuickTime 7 or higher installed. To play  
back a movie, first copy it to your computer  
and then double-click the movie file.  
“Read me” files contain important information about  
installation, including installation conditions and computer  
system requirements.  
4. Click “Install” for QuickTime 7.  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
5. Follow the instructions that appear on your  
computer screen to install QuickTime 7.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “QuickTime 7” on its label.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
Minimum Computer System Requirements  
for Movie Playback  
The minimum system requirements described below are  
necessary to play back movies recorded with this camera on a  
Windows computer.  
2. On the menu screen, click the tab for the  
Operating System : Windows XP/2000  
language you want.  
Memory  
: Pentium M, 1GHz or higher  
Pentium 4, 2GHz or higher  
Required Software : QuickTime 7  
DirectX 9.0c  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
   
Uploading Movie Files to YouTube  
IMPORTANT!  
To simplify uploading of movie files you recorded with the “For  
YouTube” BEST SHOT scene, install YouTube Uploader for  
CASIO from the CD-ROM that comes with the camera.  
The above is the recommended environment. Configuring  
this environment does not guarantee proper operation.  
Even if your computer meets the minimum requirements  
described above, certain settings and other installed  
software may interfere with proper playback of movies.  
What is YouTube?  
YouTube is a site managed by YouTube, LLC. At YouTube, you  
can upload movies you recorded and view movies that have  
been uploaded by others. You need to register as a YouTube  
user before you can upload movies there.  
Installing YouTube Uploader for CASIO  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
2. On the menu screen, click the “Language”  
down arrow button and then select the  
language you want.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
 
3. Click “YouTube Uploader for CASIO” to select  
it and then click “Read me.”  
Uploading a movie file to YouTube  
IMPORTANT!  
“Read me” files contain important information about  
installation, including installation conditions and computer  
system requirements.  
Before you can use YouTube Uploader for CASIO, you  
need to go to the YouTube website  
(http://www.youtube.com/) and register as a user there.  
Do not upload any video that is copyrighted (including  
neighboring copyrights) unless you yourself own the  
copyright or you have obtained the permission of the  
applicable copyright holder(s).  
4. Click “Install” for YouTube Uploader for  
CASIO.  
5. Follow the instructions that appear on your  
computer screen to install YouTube Uploader  
for CASIO.  
1. Record the movie you want to upload using  
the “For YouTube” BEST SHOT scene.  
2. If it isn’t already, connect your computer to the  
Internet.  
3. Connect the camera to your computer.  
See page 226 for information about connecting the  
camera to your computer.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
4. Press the USB cradle’s [USB] button.  
YouTube Uploader for CASIO will start up automatically.  
The first time you start up YouTube Uploader, a dialog  
box will appear and ask you to enter your YouTube user  
ID and your password, and to configure network  
environment settings. Follow the instructions on the  
dialog box and then click the [OK] button.  
IMPORTANT!  
The maximum file size for upload to the YouTube website  
is 100MB.  
5. The left side of the display will have an area  
for inputting a title, category, and other  
information required for uploading to  
YouTube. Enter the required information.  
6. The right side of the display shows a list of  
movie files in camera memory. Select the  
check box next to the movie file you want to  
upload.  
7. After everything is the way you want, click the  
[Upload] button to upload the file.  
After uploading is complete, click the [Exit] button to exit  
the application.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
2. On the menu screen, click the “Language”  
down arrow button and then select the  
language you want.  
Editing a Movie  
In order to edit movies on your PC, you need to install Movie  
Wizard 3.2 SE VCD from the bundled CD-ROM.  
3. Click “Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD” to select it  
and then click “Read me”.  
NOTE  
The Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD application that comes on  
“Read me” files contain important information about  
installation, including installation conditions and computer  
system requirements.  
the bundled CD-ROM can create Video-CDs, but it cannot  
created DVDs. If you want to be able to create DVDs, you  
need to upgrade to the commercial version of the software.  
See the Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD “Read me” file on the  
CD-ROM for information about and what you need to do to  
upgrade to the commercial version.  
4. Click “Install” for Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD.  
5. Follow the instructions that appear on your  
computer screen to install Movie Wizard 3.2  
SE VCD.  
Installing Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
For more powerful editing capabilities, install the trial version  
of VideoStudio 10 Plus for CASIO, which is a 30-day trial  
version.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “Movie Wizard 3.2 SE VCD”  
on its label.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
   
3. Click “Photo Transport” to select it and then  
click “Read me”.  
Transferring Images to the Camera  
In order to return images from your computer memory back to  
the camera, install Photo Transport on your computer from the  
CD-ROM that comes with the camera.  
“Read me” files contain important information about  
installation, including installation conditions and computer  
system requirements.  
Installing Photo Transport  
4. Click “Install” for Photo Transport.  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
5. Follow the instructions that appear on your  
computer screen to install Photo Transport.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “Photo Transport” on its label.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
Transferring image files to the camera  
1. First, connect the camera to your computer.  
See page 226 for information about connecting the  
camera to your computer.  
2. On the menu screen, click the “Language”  
down arrow button and then select the  
language you want.  
2. On your computer, click “Start”, “All  
Programs”, “Casio” and then “Photo  
Transport”.  
Regardless of the language you select, the English  
version of Photo Transport is installed.  
This starts up Photo Transport.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
   
3. Drop the image data you want to transfer to  
the camera onto the Photo Transport Transfer  
button.  
4. Follow the instructions that appear on the  
display to transfer the image file to the  
camera.  
Move your mouse pointer to the image file you want to  
transfer, and then hold down your mouse button. Keeping  
your mouse button depressed, drag the mouse pointer and  
the image file along with it to the Photo Transport Transfer  
button, and then release the mouse button.  
The image transfer method and detailed image settings  
used depend on the Photo Transport settings. For details,  
see Photo Transport help (page 242).  
IMPORTANT!  
Certain types of images may not be able to be transferred.  
You cannot transfer movies to the camera.  
Help button  
Settings button  
Exit button  
Only image files of the following formats can be transferred  
to the camera: JPG, JPEG, JPE, and BMP. The transfer  
operation converts BMP files to JPEG format.  
Transfer button  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
5. Use your mouse to select the area of the  
screen you want to capture.  
Transferring screen captures to the camera  
1. First, connect the camera to your computer.  
See page 226 for information about connecting the  
camera to your computer.  
Move your mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the area  
you want to capture and then hold down your mouse button.  
Keeping your mouse button depressed, drag the pointer  
down to the right corner of the area and then release the  
mouse button.  
2. On your computer, click “Start”, “All  
Programs”, “Casio” and then “Photo  
Transport”.  
This starts up Photo Transport.  
3. Display the screen whose screen capture you  
want to transfer.  
4. Click the Photo Transport Capture button.  
Capture area  
Capture button  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
6. Follow the instructions that appear on the  
display to transfer a capture of the selected  
area to the camera.  
Viewing User Documentation (PDF Files)  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
The image transfer method and detailed image settings  
used depend on the Photo Transport settings. For details,  
see Photo Transport help (page 242).  
Use the CD-ROM that has “User’s Guide Included” on its  
label.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
IMPORTANT!  
The transfer operation converts screen captures to JPEG  
format.  
2. On the menu screen, click the “Language”  
down arrow button and then select the  
language you want.  
Photo Transport Setup and Help  
Clicking the Settings button will display a dialog box that you can  
use to configure image transfer settings, to specify the transfer  
method, etc. For detailed information about the setup,  
operational procedures, and troubleshooting, click the Help  
button.  
3. Click “Manual” to select it and then click the  
name of the application whose manual you  
want to read.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
   
IMPORTANT!  
Using the Camera with a Macintosh  
You must have Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader  
installed on your computer in order to view the contents of  
a PDF file. If you do not already have Adobe Reader or  
Adobe Acrobat Reader installed, install Adobe Reader from  
the bundled CD-ROM that has “Adobe Reader” on its label.  
Install the required software in accordance with what version of  
the Macintosh OS you are running and what you want to do.  
OS  
Version  
See  
page:  
Objective  
Install this software:  
Viewing images  
on your  
Macintosh  
Storing images  
on your  
User Registration  
You can perform user registration over the Internet. To do so, of  
course, you need to be able to connect to the Internet with your  
computer.  
OS 9/  
OS X  
USB driver not  
required.  
Macintosh  
Use commercially  
available software.  
OS 9  
OS X  
OS 9  
Transfer of images  
from the camera  
and management of  
images on your  
Macintosh  
1. Click the “Register” button.  
Use iPhoto, which  
comes bundled with  
your operating  
system.  
This starts up your Web browser and accesses the user  
registration website. Follow the instructions that appear  
on your computer screen to register.  
Movie file playback  
not supported.  
Exiting the CD-ROM Menu  
On the CD-ROM menu, click “Exit”.  
Movie file playback  
supported under OS X  
v10.3.9 or higher  
Play movies  
OS X  
when QuickTime 7 or  
higher is installed.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
243  
     
System Requirements  
OS  
Version  
See  
page:  
Objective  
Install this software:  
System requirements are different for each of the applications.  
Be sure to check the requirements for the particular application  
you are trying to use. Note that the values provided here are  
minimum requirements for running each application. Actual  
requirements are greater, depending on the number of images  
and the sizes of the images being handled.  
Transfer documents  
to the camera  
CASIO DATA  
TRANSPORT 1.0  
OS X  
Use Adobe Reader or  
Adobe Acrobat  
Reader, which comes  
bundled with your  
operating system.  
View the User’s  
Guide  
OS 9/  
OS X  
CASIO DATA TRANSPORT 1.0  
OS : OS X 10.2.8 or greater  
Other: Sufficient memory to run the operating system  
IMPORTANT!  
For details about the minimum system requirements for  
each software application, see the “readme” files on the  
CD-ROM that comes bundled with the camera.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
Connecting the Camera to Your Computer  
Viewing and Storing Images on a  
Macintosh  
the First Time  
You can view and store images (snapshot and movie files) on  
your Macintosh by connecting to the camera.  
1. Connect the bundled AC adaptor to the [DC IN  
5.3V] connector of the USB cradle and then  
plug it in to a household power outlet.  
IMPORTANT!  
Connection is not supported to a Macintosh running Mac  
OS 8.6 or lower, or Mac OS X 10.0. Connection is  
supported to a Macintosh running Mac OS 9 or OS X (10.1,  
10.2, 10.3, 10.4) only. Use the standard USB driver that  
comes with the operating system for connection.  
If you do not plan to use the AC adaptor, make sure that  
the camera’s battery is fully charged.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
     
2. Connect the USB cable that comes bundled  
with the camera to the USB cradle and the  
USB port of your Macintosh.  
3. Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button to turn it  
on and then press [MENU].  
Do not place the camera on the USB cradle yet.  
USB Cable (Bundled)  
Connector  
4. On the “Set Up” tab, select “USB” and then  
press [X].  
Mini-B  
USB Port  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Mass Storage” and  
then press [SET].  
Connector A  
6. Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button to turn it  
off and then place the camera on the USB  
cradle.  
[
] (USB) Connector  
Do not place the camera onto the USB cradle while it is  
turned on.  
Orient the USB plug so it correctly matches the shape of  
the USB port when you connect them.  
Plug the USB cable into the ports securely, as far as it will  
go. Proper operation is not possible if connections are not  
correct.  
If you plan to transfer images from the camera’s built-in  
memory to your Macintosh, make sure there is no  
memory card loaded in the camera.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
 
Camera-Macintosh Connection  
7. Press the USB cradle’s  
[USB] button.  
Pressing the cradle’s [USB] button puts it into the USB mode,  
which is indicated by the USB lamp lighting green. In this mode,  
your Macintosh recognizes the memory card loaded in the  
camera (or the camera’s built-in memory if it does not have a  
memory card loaded) as a drive.  
[USB]  
The appearance of the drive icon depends on the Mac OS  
version you are using.  
USB Lamp  
From now on, you will not have to perform steps 3 through 5 in  
the above procedure when you connect the camera to your  
Macintosh (unless you change the camera’s USB settings for  
some reason).  
IMPORTANT!  
Never disconnect the USB cable or remove the camera  
from the USB cradle without exiting the USB mode first.  
Doing so can corrupt image data. See “Removing the  
Camera from the USB Cradle” on page 250 for the correct  
steps you need to perform to remove the camera from the  
cradle safely.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
 
Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh  
Viewing Camera Images on Your Macintosh  
After connecting the camera to your Macintosh, you can view  
after the First Time  
Since you need to configure menu settings only the first time you  
connect the camera to your Macintosh, later connections are  
much simpler.  
camera images on your Macintosh screen.  
1. Double-click the camera’s drive icon.  
2. Double-click the “DCIM” folder.  
1. Press the camera’s [ON/OFF] button to turn it  
off and then place the camera on the USB  
cradle.  
3. Double-click the folder that contains the image  
you want to view.  
2. Press the USB cradle’s  
[USB] button.  
4. Double-click the file that contains the image  
you want to view.  
Pressing the cradle’s [USB]  
button puts it into the USB  
mode, which is indicated by  
the USB lamp lighting  
This displays the image.  
IMPORTANT!  
Do not leave the same image displayed on your Macintosh  
screen for a long time. Doing so can cause image “burn in”.  
green.  
[USB]  
NOTE  
An image that was rotated on the camera will be displayed  
on your Macintosh screen in its original (unrotated)  
orientation.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Saving an Image on Your Macintosh  
IMPORTANT!  
In order to work on an image to put it into an album, you must  
first save it to your Macintosh. To save a camera image to your  
Macintosh, you must first establish a connection between them  
via the camera’s USB cradle.  
Never use your computer to modify, delete, move, or  
rename any image files that are in the camera’s built-in  
memory or memory card. Doing so can cause problems  
with the camera’s image management data, which will  
make it impossible to play back images on the camera and  
can drastically alter remaining memory capacity. Whenever  
you want to modify, delete, move, or rename an image, do  
so only on images that have been copied to your  
Macintosh.  
1. Double-click the camera’s drive icon.  
2. Drop the “DCIM” folder into the folder where  
you want to store it.  
This copies the “DCIM” folder to the folder on your  
Macintosh.  
Never unplug the USB cable, or operate the camera or  
cradle while viewing or storing images. Doing so can cause  
data to become corrupted.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
Removing the Camera from the USB Cradle  
Transfer of Images from the Camera and  
Management of Images on Your  
Macintosh  
1. On your Macintosh screen, drag the camera  
drive to Trash.  
If you are running Mac OS X, you can manage snapshots using  
iPhoto, which comes bundled with your operating system.  
If you are running Mac OS 9, use commercially available  
software.  
2. Press the USB cradle [USB] button. After  
making sure that the cradle’s USB lamp is not  
lit, remove the camera from the cradle.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
     
Playing Movies  
Viewing User Documentation (PDF Files)  
You can use QuickTime, which comes  
bundled with your operating system, to play  
back movies. To play back a movie, first copy  
the movie to your Macintosh and then double-  
click the movie file.  
You must have Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader  
installed on your computer in order to view the contents of a  
PDF file. If you don’t, go to the Adobe Systems Incorporated  
website and install Acrobat Reader.  
1. On the CD-ROM, open the “Manual” folder.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “User’s Guide included” on its  
label.  
Minimum Computer System Requirements  
for Movie Playback  
The minimum system requirements described below are  
necessary to use your Macintosh to play back movies recorded  
with this camera.  
2. Open the “Digital Camera” folder and then  
open the folder for the language whose user’s  
guide you want to view.  
OS  
: OS X 10.3.9 or greater  
Required Software : QuickTime 7 or greater  
3. Open the file named “camera_xx.pdf”.  
“xx” is the language code (Example: camera_e.pdf is for  
English.)  
IMPORTANT!  
The above is the recommended environment. Configuring  
this environment does not guarantee proper operation.  
Even if your computer meets the minimum requirements  
described above, certain settings and other installed  
software may interfere with proper playback of movies.  
Movie file playback is not supported under OS 9.  
Registering as a User  
Internet registration only is supported. Visit the following CASIO  
website to register:  
http://world.casio.com/qv/register/  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
       
Other types of computers  
Use either of the method described below.  
– Use a commercially  
Reading Files Directly from a Memory  
Card  
The method you should use to read files from a memory card  
depends on the type of computer you have. Some typical  
examples are shown below. After you connect, use the same  
procedures as those that you use when the camera is connected  
to your computer via the USB cradle.  
available memory card  
reader/writer that is  
appropriate for the  
memory card you are  
using. See the user  
documentation that comes with the memory card reader/  
writer for details about how to use it.  
– Use a commercially available PC card reader/writer and a  
commercially available PC card adapter that is appropriate  
to the type of memory card you are using. See the user  
documentation that comes with the PC card reader/writer  
and PC card adapter for details about how to use them.  
If your computer has a memory card slot  
After checking to make sure that your computer’s card slot is  
compatible with the memory card you are using to store images,  
insert the memory card into the slot.  
If your computer has a PC card slot  
Use a commercially available PC card adapter that is  
appropriate for the memory card. For full details, see the user  
documentation that comes with the PC card adapter and your  
computer.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
 
Memory Folder Structure  
Memory Card Data  
The camera stores images you shoot and other data in  
accordance with the Design Rule for Camera File System  
(DCF).  
(DCIM Folder)  
(Total Index File)  
DCIM  
INDEX.PVM  
1
(Recording Folder)  
(Image File)  
100CASIO*  
CIMG0001.JPG  
CIMG0002.MOV  
CIMG0003.WAV  
CIMG0004.JPG  
CIMG0004.WAV  
(Movie File)  
(Audio File)  
(Audio Snapshot Image File)  
(Audio Snapshot Audio File)  
About DCF  
DCF is a system that defines both image file formats and the  
structure of the folders that store data. This makes it possible for  
a digital camera, printer, or other DCF-compliant device to  
display or print image data from another DCF device.  
(Document Folder)  
(Document File)  
(Document File)  
101_VIEW  
VIEW001.JPE  
VIEW002.JPE  
(Document Management File)  
(Document Management File)  
(MPV Management File)  
_THUMB.FNX  
_THUMB.JPE  
VIEW.PVM  
1
(Recording Folder)  
(Document Folder)  
102CASIO*  
103_VIEW  
(DPOF File Folder)  
(DPOF File)  
MISC  
AUTPRINT.MRK  
2
(Snapshot BEST SHOT Folder)  
(Snapshot User Setup File)  
(Snapshot User Setup File)  
SCENE*  
US880001.JPE  
US880002.JPE  
2
(Movie BEST SHOT Folder)  
(Movie User Setup File)  
(Movie User Setup File)  
MSCENE*  
US880001.JPE  
US880002.JPE  
2
(FAVORITE Folder)  
(Recording File)  
(Recording File)  
FAVORITE*  
CIMG0001.JPG  
CIMG0002.JPG  
2
(Family Face Recognition Folder)  
FAMILY*  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
     
Folder and File Contents  
(Background Music Folder)  
(Background Music File)  
(Background Music File)  
SSBGM  
SSBGM001.WAV  
SSBGM002.WAV  
DCIM Folder  
Folder that contains all of the camera files  
Total Index File  
2
(Startup Screen File)  
STARTING.JPG*  
Management file of the document folder  
Recording Folder  
Folder that contains files recorded with the camera  
Image File  
File of an image shot with the camera. Extension is “JPG”.  
Movie File  
File of a movie shot with the camera. Extension is “MOV”.  
Audio File  
*1 Other folders are created when the following BEST SHOT  
scenes are used for recording: “For eBay” or “Auction”  
(scene name depends on camera model), or “For YouTube”.  
The following shows the name of the folder created for each  
scene.  
eBay scene: 100_EBAY  
Auction scene: 100_AUCT  
YouTube scene: 100YOUTB  
Audio recording file. Extension is “WAV”.  
Audio Snapshot Image File  
*2 Indicates files that can be created in built-in memory only.  
Image file of an audio snapshot. Extension is “JPG”.  
Audio Snapshot Audio File  
Audio recording file of an audio snapshot. Extension is  
WAV”.  
Document Folder  
Folder that contains document files transferred to the camera  
Document File  
Document files transferred to the camera  
Document Management File  
Management file for documents transferred to the camera  
MPV Management File  
Management file for documents transferred to the camera  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
 
DPOF File Folder  
Folder that contains DPOF files, etc.  
Snapshot BEST SHOT Folder  
Folder that contains snapshot BEST SHOT user setup files  
Snapshot User Setup File  
File of a snapshot BEST SHOT user setup  
Movie BEST SHOT Folder  
Supported Image Files  
Image files shot with this camera  
DCF-compliant image files  
Even if an image is DCF-compliant, this camera still may not be  
able to display it. When displaying an image recorded on  
another camera, it may take a long time for the image to appear  
on this camera’s monitor screen.  
Folder that contains Movie BEST SHOT user setup files  
Movie User Setup File  
Files that contain Movie BEST SHOT user setups  
FAVORITE Folder  
Folder that contains Favorites image files. Size of images is  
320 × 240 pixels.  
Family Face Recognition Folder  
Folder that contains face members recorded for family  
members. Any manipulation of the data in the “FAMILY” folder  
can cause the camera to stop operating properly. Never  
delete or edit any data in the “FAMILY” folder.  
Background Music Folder  
Folder that contains background music files transferred to the  
camera  
Startup Screen File  
File for storing the startup screen image. This file is created  
when you specify an image for use as the startup screen  
image.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
Built-in Memory and Memory Card Data  
Handling Precautions  
When saving camera data to a computer hard disk, MO disk,  
or other medium, be sure to transfer the entire DCIM folder  
and its contents. Changing the name of the DCIM to a date or  
something similar after you copy it to your computer is a good  
way to keep track of multiple DCIM folders. When moving the  
folder back to the camera, however, be sure to change its  
name back to DCIM. This camera does not recognize any  
folder name besides DCIM.  
All of the other folders inside the DCIM folder must also have  
their original names if you transfer them back to the camera.  
Folders and files must be stored in accordance with the  
Memory Folder Structure” shown on page 253 in order for the  
camera to be able to recognize them correctly.  
USING THE CAMERA WITH A COMPUTER  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
256  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA (DATA STORAGE)  
You can use CASIO DATA TRANSPORT to transfer documents,  
web page images, and other documents you can view on you  
Transferring Documents to the  
Camera  
computer screen to the camera. Then you can view the  
documents on the camera’s monitor screen.  
Transferring documents from a  
computer running Windows  
To transfer documents on your computer to the camera so you  
can view it on the monitor screen, you need to install CASIO  
DATA TRANSPORT from the CD-ROM that comes with the  
camera.  
NOTE  
In this section, anything you transfer to the camera is called  
a “document”. Some documents can contain multiple  
“pages”.  
IMPORTANT!  
Just about any document you can print from your computer  
can be transferred to the camera. Note, however, the ability  
to properly transfer and display any particular type of  
document is not guaranteed.  
Certain types of documents may look different on the  
camera’s monitor screen than it looks on your computer  
screen.  
Installing CASIO DATA TRANSPORT  
1. Start up your computer, and place the bundled  
CD-ROM into its CD-ROM drive.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “DATA TRANSPORT” on its  
label.  
Normally, this should cause the menu screen to appear  
automatically. If your computer does not display the menu  
screen automatically, navigate to the CD-ROM on your  
computer and then double-click the “AutoMenu.exe” file.  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
257  
(DATA STORAGE)  
       
2. On the menu screen, click the tab for the  
language you want.  
Transferring documents  
1. First, connect the camera to your computer.  
Before connecting the camera to your computer, make  
sure that a memory card is loaded in the camera.  
See page 226 for information about connecting the  
camera to your computer.  
Regardless of the language you select, the English  
version of CASIO DATA TRANSPORT is installed.  
3. Click the DATA TRANSPORT “Read me” file  
and read its contents.  
“Read me” files contain important information about  
installation, including installation conditions and computer  
system requirements.  
2. On your computer, open the document data  
file that you want to transfer to the camera.  
3. On the application menu of the currently open  
document, select “Print”. On the print dialog  
box that appears, select “CASIO DATA  
4. Click “Install” for DATA TRANSPORT.  
5. Follow the instructions that appear on your  
computer screen to install CASIO DATA  
TRANSPORT.  
TRANSPORT” for the “Printer Name” setting.  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258  
(DATA STORAGE)  
4. Click the [OK] button.  
Transferring documents from a  
Macintosh  
This will display a dialog box for customizing document file  
properties (date, file name, icon).  
To transfer documents on your computer to the camera so you  
can view it on the monitor screen, you need to install CASIO  
DATA TRANSPORT from the CD-ROM that comes with the  
camera.  
5. Check the current data settings (date, file  
name, icon) and then click the [OK] button.  
This will convert the document data to a JPEG image and  
transfer the image to the camera.  
Installing CASIO DATA TRANSPORT  
You can change the date, filename, and icon settings if  
you want.  
Before starting installation, be sure to read any “readme” file that  
accompanies CASIO DATA TRANSPORT. “readme” files  
contain important information about installation, including  
installation conditions and computer system requirements.  
To cancel the transfer, click the [Cancel] button.  
If you want a document image be displayed on the  
camera’s monitor screen using an orientation that is  
different from that used on the computer screen, click the  
[Properties] button on the print dialog box, change the  
“Orientation” setting, and then click the [OK] button.  
1. Place the CD-ROM that comes bundled with  
the camera into your Macintosh CD-ROM  
drive.  
Use the CD-ROM that has “DATA TRANSPORT” on its  
label.  
2. Open the folder named “DATA TRANSPORT”.  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
(DATA STORAGE)  
 
3. Double-click “TRANSPORT_Installer”.  
5. Check the current data settings (date, file  
name, icon) and then click the [OK] button.  
This will convert the document to a JPEG image and  
transfer the image to the camera.  
4. Follow the instructions in the “readme” file to  
install CASIO DATA TRANSPORT.  
You can change the date, filename, and icon settings if  
you want.  
Transferring documents  
To cancel the transfer, click the [Cancel] button.  
1. First, connect the camera to your Macintosh.  
Before connecting the camera to your Macintosh, make  
sure that a memory card is loaded in the camera.  
See page 245 for information about connecting the  
camera to your Macintosh.  
2. On your Macintosh, open the document that  
you want to transfer to the camera.  
3. On the menu bar, click “File” and then “Print”.  
4. Click the PDF button at the bottom of the  
dialog box and then select “CASIO DATA  
TRANSPORT” from the menu that appears.  
This will display a dialog box for customizing document file  
properties (date, file name, icon).  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
260  
(DATA STORAGE)  
3. Use [S], [T], [W], and [X] to move the  
boundary to the document you want to select.  
The document menu screen can show up to 12  
documents. If there are more than 12 documents in  
camera memory, use [S] or [T] to switch between the  
menu screens of 12 images each.  
Viewing a Transferred Document on  
the Camera  
1. On the camera, select either the REC mode or  
the PLAY mode.  
2. Press [DATA].  
4. Press [SET] to open  
the currently selected  
document and display  
its pages (contents).  
This enters the data mode  
and displays a menu of  
documents currently in  
camera memory.  
The currently selected  
document is the one with  
the red boundary around it.  
Pressing [DATA] will return to the screen that was  
displayed before you entered the data mode.  
5. Use [X] (forward) and [W] (back) to scroll  
through the pages of the document.  
Pressing [S] jumps to page 1 of the document.  
Pressing [  
] enters the REC mode, while pressing  
[
] enters the PLAY mode.  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
261  
(DATA STORAGE)  
   
Rotating a Document Page  
You can use the following procedure to rotate a document page  
NOTE  
Pressing [SET] or the zoom button toggles between the  
on the display.  
document menu and the document page screens.  
Pressing [DISP] while the document page screen is on the  
display will display a menu screen for configuring screen  
settings. You can use the menu to turn display information  
on or off.  
1. Press [DATA].  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “DATA” tab, select “Rotation”, and  
then press [X].  
IMPORTANT!  
Note that selecting “All Images” for printing will also print all  
the pages of all the documents that have been transferred  
to the camera. Regardless of whether you are printing at  
home or if you are using an outside printing service, make  
sure you know what is stored in a memory card (especially  
documents) before selecting “All Images” (page 217).  
4. Use [W] and [X] to display the document page  
you want to rotate.  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “Rotate”, and then  
press [SET].  
Each press of [SET] will rotate the displayed image 90  
degrees left.  
6. When the displayed image is at the orientation  
you want, press [MENU].  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262  
(DATA STORAGE)  
 
Specifying the Initial Data Mode Screen  
NOTE  
You can use the following procedure to configure the camera  
so either the document data list or the last document page you  
were viewing appears first whenever you press [DATA] to enter  
the data mode.  
Even if “Page View” is selected for the above setting, the  
document data list view will appear initially if a data list  
was on the display the last time you exited the data mode.  
1. Press [MENU].  
2. On the “Set Up” tab, select “DATA View”, and  
then press [X].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select the setting you  
want, and then press [SET].  
To have this screen appear first: Select this setting:  
Document menu  
List View  
This displays the document page  
you last viewed.  
Page View  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
263  
(DATA STORAGE)  
6. To protect other documents, repeat steps 4  
and 5.  
Managing Document Data on the  
Camera  
To exit the memory protect operation, press [MENU].  
To unprotect a specific document  
Protecting Document Data  
Perform the procedure under “To protect a specific document”,  
but in step 5 select “Off” instead of “On”.  
You can protect a specific document or all documents against  
deletion (memory protect).  
To protect a specific document  
1. Press [DATA].  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “DATA” tab, select “Protect”, and then  
press [X].  
4. Use [W] and [X] to display the document you  
want to protect.  
5. Use [S] and [T] to select “On” and then press  
[SET].  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264  
(DATA STORAGE)  
   
To protect all documents  
1. Press [DATA].  
Deleting Document Data  
Deleting a Document Page  
After displaying a document page, you can delete a single  
document page or all the pages in a document at the same time.  
2. Press [MENU].  
3. On the “DATA” tab, select “Protect”, and then  
press [X].  
To delete a single document page  
1. Display a page in the document that contains  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “All Files : On” and  
the page you want to delete and then press  
then press [SET].  
[T] (  
).  
5. Press [MENU].  
2. Use [W] and [X] to select the document page  
To unprotect all documents  
you want to delete.  
Perform the procedure under “To protect all documents”, but in  
step 4 select “All Files : Off” instead of “All Files : On”.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “1 page” and then  
press [SET].  
4. To delete other document pages, repeat steps  
2 and 3.  
To exit the delete operation, press [MENU].  
IMPORTANT!  
Single document pages cannot be deleted when a  
document has more than 1600 pages. Attempting to delete  
a single page for such a document will cause the message  
“This function is not supported for this file.” to appear.  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
265  
(DATA STORAGE)  
 
To delete all the pages in a document page  
Deleting Documents  
You can use the document menu to select a specific document  
and delete it, or you can delete all documents currently in  
camera memory.  
1. Display a page in the document whose pages  
you want to delete and then press [T] (  
).  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select “All pages” and then  
To delete a single document  
press [SET].  
1. On the document menu, use [S], [T], [W], and  
[X] to move the selection boundary to the  
document you want to delete.  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Yes”.  
To cancel the delete operation, select “No” instead of  
“Yes”.  
2. Press [MENU].  
4. Press [SET].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “1 doc” and then  
press [SET].  
4. Use [S] and [T] to select “Yes”.  
To cancel the delete operation, select “No” instead of  
“Yes”.  
5. Press [SET].  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266  
(DATA STORAGE)  
To delete all documents  
1. While the document menu is displayed, press  
[MENU].  
2. Use [S] and [T] to select “All docs” and then  
press [SET].  
3. Use [S] and [T] to select “Yes”.  
To cancel the delete operation, select “No” instead of  
“Yes”.  
4. Press [SET].  
This will delete all documents in camera memory and  
display the message “No documents in memory. Exiting  
data mode.”.  
NOTE  
Formatting camera memory (pages 50, 209) will also  
delete all documents currently in camera memory.  
TRANSFERRING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR CAMERA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
(DATA STORAGE)  
APPENDIX  
Back  
General Guide  
The numbers in parentheses indicate the pages where each part  
789bkbl  
is explained.  
bm bn bo  
Camera  
Front  
Shutter (page 64)  
[ON/OFF] (Power)  
(page 43)  
1
2
bp  
4
1 2 3  
SET  
Flash (page 75)  
3
4
AF Assist/Self-timer Lamp  
(pages 62, 69, 79, 277)  
Lens  
bt bs br bq  
Operation Lamp  
(pages 43, 64, 277)  
[DATA] Button (page 261)  
[DISP] Button (page 54)  
Strap Hole (page 2)  
Control Button  
([S], [T], [W], [X])  
[SET] Button  
[BS] Button (page 104)  
[MENU] Button (page 52)  
Monitor Screen (page 53)  
7
bo  
bp  
5
6
Microphone (pages 86, 96)  
8
9
bk  
bq  
br  
bs  
bt  
[
] (PLAY) Button  
5
(pages 43, 208)  
[
] (REC) Button  
bl  
bm  
bn  
(pages 43, 208)  
Zoom Button  
(pages 71, 165, 166)  
6
[
] (Movie) Button  
(page 95)  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268  
   
Bottom  
USB Cradle  
Front  
Camera Contact (page 38)  
USB Lamp  
[USB] Button  
[PHOTO] Button  
(pages 161, 162)  
[CHARGE] Lamp  
(pages 38, 279)  
1
2
1
3
4
5
cn cm cl  
ck  
5
Battery/Memory Card Slots (pages 36, 48)  
Cradle Contact (page 38)  
Tripod Hole  
Use this hole when attaching to a tripod.  
Speaker (page 152)  
ck  
cl  
cm  
4
3
2
cn  
Back  
[DC IN 5.3V] (External Power)  
Terminal (page 37)  
6
7
8
[
] (USB) Connector  
[AV OUT] (AV output port)  
(page 162)  
6
7
8
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269  
Monitor Screen Contents  
The monitor screen uses various indicators, icons, and values to keep you informed of the camera’s status.  
The sample screens in this section are intended to show you the locations of all the indicators and figures that can appear on the  
monitor screen in various modes. They do not represent screens that actually appear on the camera.  
Focus Mode (page 121)  
Continuous Shutter Mode  
(page 81)  
Face Recognition Setting  
(page 87)  
Snapshot Recording Mode  
1
2
bl  
Panel : On  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Anti Shake Indicator (page 110)  
ISO Sensitivity (page 135)  
White Balance Setting (page 132)  
Exposure Compensation  
(page 131)  
bm  
bn  
bo  
bp  
Recording Mode  
9
bk  
bl  
bm  
bn  
bo  
bp  
3
4
5
6
Digital zoom indicator (page 73)  
Metering Mode (page 136)  
Remaining Snapshot Memory  
Capacity (page 63)  
Snapshot Image Size (page 66)  
Snapshot Image Quality (page 68)  
Flash Mode (page 75)  
cl  
ck  
Date/Time (page 202)  
bq  
br  
bs  
bt  
ck  
cl  
Shutter Speed (page 65)  
Aperture Value (page 65)  
Battery Level Indicator (page 40)  
Histogram (page 142)  
7
8
9
bk  
bt  
bnbsbr bq  
Self-timer Mode (page 79)  
Panel : Off  
91bo2bk3457 6  
Focus Frame (pages 63, 126)  
8
IMPORTANT!  
cl  
bm  
ck  
The aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity will all turn orange  
if any one of them is not correct when the shutter button is half-pressed.  
bn  
bs  
br  
bq  
bt  
bp  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
   
Movie Recording Mode  
Focus Mode (page 121)  
Recording Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Panel : On  
1
2
3 4  
Remaining Movie Memory Capacity (page 95)  
Movie Recording Time (page 95)  
Anti Shake Indicator (page 110)  
White Balance Setting (page 132)  
Exposure Compensation (page 131)  
Battery Level Indicator (page 40)  
Histogram (page 142)  
5
6
9
8
7
Panel : Off  
16  
2
3
4
5
9
8
7
APPENDIX  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
271  
Snapshot Playback Mode  
Movie Playback Mode  
12  
3
12  
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
bq  
bp  
6
7
bo bnbmblbk  
File Type (page 151)  
Protect Indicator (page 190)  
Folder Name/File Name  
(page 189)  
Snapshot Image Quality  
(page 68)  
Recording Mode  
Battery Level Indicator  
(page 40)  
Histogram (page 142)  
Exposure Compensation  
(page 131)  
File Type (page 153)  
Protect Indicator (page 190)  
Folder Name/File Name  
(page 189)  
Movie Recording Time  
(page 153)  
1
2
3
bn  
bo  
1
2
3
bp  
bq  
4
5
4
5
Snapshot Image Size  
(page 66)  
Movie Image Quality  
(page 94)  
ISO Sensitivity (page 135)  
Aperture Value (page 65)  
Shutter Speed (page 65)  
Date/Time (page 202)  
Metering Mode (page 136)  
White Balance Setting  
(page 132)  
Date/Time (page 202)  
Battery Level Indicator  
(page 40)  
6
7
8
9
bk  
bl  
6
7
Flash Mode (page 75)  
bm  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
   
Quick Shutter  
Audio Snap  
Grid  
On* / Off  
On / Off*  
On / Off*  
On* / Off  
On* / Off  
Menu Reference  
The tables in this section show the items that appears on the  
menus that appear on the monitor screen when you press  
[MENU]. The items included on the menus depend on whether  
the camera is in the REC mode or PLAY mode.  
Review  
Icon Help  
Memory  
An asterisk (*) indicates reset default settings.  
BEST SHOT: On / Off*  
Flash: On* / Off  
REC Mode  
Focus: On / Off*  
White Balance: On / Off*  
ISO: On / Off*  
REC Tab Menu  
Focus  
(Auto Focus)* /  
(Pan Focus) /  
(Manual Focus)  
Macro /  
AF Area: On* / Off  
Metering: On / Off*  
Self-timer: On / Off*  
Flash Intensity: On / Off*  
Digital Zoom: On* / Off  
MF Position: On / Off*  
Zoom Position: On / Off*  
(Infinity) /  
Continuous  
Self-timer  
Normal Speed / High Speed / Flash Cont. /  
Zoom Cont. / Off*  
10 sec / 2 sec / X3 / Off*  
Face  
Family First / Normal / Off* / Priority /  
Recognition  
Record Family / Edit Family  
Anti Shake  
AF Area  
Auto / Off*  
Spot* /  
On* / Off  
Multi /  
Tracking  
AF Assist  
Light  
Digital Zoom  
L/R Key  
On* / Off  
Metering / EV Shift / White Balance / ISO /  
Self-timer / Off*  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
   
Quality Tab Menu  
Saturation  
Contrast  
+2 / +1 / 0* / –1 / –2  
+2 / +1 / 0* / –1 / –2  
Size  
8M (3264 × 2448)* / 3:2 (3264 × 2176) /  
16:9 (3264 × 1840) / 6M (2816 × 2112) /  
4M (2304 × 1728) / 2M (1600 × 1200) /  
VGA (640 × 480)  
Flash Intensity +2 / +1 / 0* / –1 / –2  
Flash Assist Auto* / Off  
Quality  
Fine / Normal* / Economy  
(Snapshots)  
Quality  
UHQ / UHQ Wide / HQ* / HQ Wide / Normal /  
(Movies)  
LP  
EV Shift  
–2.0 / –1.7 / –1.3 / –1.0 / –0.7 / –0.3 / 0.0* /  
+0.3 / +0.7 / +1.0 / +1.3 / +1.7 / +2.0  
White Balance Auto* /  
(Shade) /  
(Daylight Fluorescent) /  
(Daylight) /  
(Overcast) /  
(Day White Fluorescent) /  
N
(Tungsten) /  
D
Manual  
ISO  
Auto* / ISO 64 / ISO 100 / ISO 200 / ISO 400 /  
ISO 800  
Metering  
Multi* /  
Center weighted /  
Spot  
Dynamic  
Range  
Expand +2 / Expand +1 / Off*  
Portrait Refiner Noise Filter +2 / Noise Filter +1 / Off*  
Color Filter  
Off* / B/W / Sepia / Red / Green / Blue / Yellow /  
Pink / Purple  
Sharpness  
+2 / +1 / 0* / –1 / –2  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274  
Set Up Tab Menu  
Video Out  
Format  
Reset  
NTSC 4:3 / NTSC 16:9 / PAL 4:3 / PAL 16:9  
Format / Cancel*  
Sounds  
Startup* / Half Shutter / Shutter / Operation /  
Operation / Play  
Reset / Cancel*  
Startup  
On (Selectable image) / Off*  
Continue* / Reset  
File No.  
Language  
Changes the screen text language.  
The number and types of languages depend  
on the geographic area where the camera  
was marketed.  
World Time  
Home* / World  
Home Time setup (city, DST, etc.)  
World Time setup (city, DST, etc.)  
Date / Date&Time / Off*  
Time setting  
Timestamp  
Adjust  
Date Style  
DATA View  
Sleep  
YY/MM/DD / DD/MM/YY / MM/DD/YY  
Page View / List View*  
30 sec / 1 min* / 2 min / Off  
Auto Power Off 1 min* / 2 min / 5 min  
REC / PLAY  
USB  
Power On* / Power On/Off / Disable  
Mass Storage (USB DIRECT-PRINT)* /  
PTP (PictBridge)  
APPENDIX  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
 
PLAY Mode  
Rotation  
Resize  
Rotate* / Cancel  
6M (2816 × 2112)* / 4M (2304 × 1728) /  
VGA (640 × 480) / Cancel  
PLAY Tab Menu  
Slideshow  
Start* / Images / Time / Interval / Effect /  
Trimming  
Dubbing  
Copy  
Cancel  
Layout Print  
Built-in  
Card* / Card  
Built-in / Cancel  
MOTION PRINT  
9 frames* / 1 frame / Cancel  
Anti Shake On / Off*  
Movie Editing  
“Set Up” Tab  
Cut (Before) /  
The contents of the “Set Up” tab are the same in the REC  
mode and PLAY mode.  
Cut (Between) /  
Cut (After) / Cancel*  
Dynamic Range Expand +2 / Expand +1 / Cancel*  
White Balance  
(Daylight) /  
(Shade) /  
(Overcast) /  
(Day White  
N
Fluorescent) /  
(Daylight Fluorescent) /  
D
(Tungsten) / Cancel*  
Brightness  
Keystone  
+2 / +1 / 0* / –1 / –2  
Color Correction  
Calendar  
Favorites  
Show* / Save / Cancel  
Select images* / All images / Cancel  
On* / All Files : On / Cancel  
DPOF Printing  
Protect  
Date/Time  
APPENDIX  
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276  
Display Menu Reference  
Indicator Lamps  
The camera has lamps: an Operation Lamp and an AF Assist/  
Self-timer Lamp. These Lamps light and flash to indicate the  
current operational status of the camera.  
The tables in this section show the items that appears on the  
menus that appear on the monitor screen when you press  
[DISP]. Most of these items are for configuring monitor screen  
settings. The items included on the menus depend on whether  
the camera is in the REC mode or PLAY mode.  
Operation Lamp  
AF Assist/Self-timer Lamp  
An asterisk (*) indicates reset default settings.  
REC Mode  
Layout  
Info.  
Panel: On* / Panel: Off  
Show* / +Histogram / Hide  
Auto / +2 / +1 / 0 / –1  
Brightness  
Type  
Dynamic* / Vivid / Real / Night /  
Power Saving  
PLAY Mode  
Layout  
Info.  
4:3 / Wide*  
Same as REC mode settings.  
Same as REC mode settings.  
Same as REC mode settings.  
Brightness  
Type  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
277  
     
REC Mode  
IMPORTANT!  
Operation Lamp  
Never remove the memory card from the camera while the  
operation lamp is flashing green. Doing so will cause the  
image you shot to be lost.  
Meaning  
Color  
Status  
Operational (Power on, recording enabled). /  
Auto Focus operation was successful. / LCD  
is off or in sleep state.  
Lit  
PLAY mode  
Green  
Storing movie or processing image. / Image is  
Operation Lamp  
Meaning  
Flashing being stored. / Cannot Auto Focus. / Card is  
being formatted. / Powering down.  
Color  
Status  
Memory card is locked. / Cannot create  
folder. / Memory is full. / Write error.  
Lit  
Operational (Power on, recording enabled).  
Lit  
One of the following operations is in progress:  
Red  
Memory card problem. / Memory card is  
Flashing unformatted. / BEST SHOT setup cannot be  
registered. / Low battery alert.  
Delete, DPOF, protect, copy, format, resize,  
Green  
Flashing trimming, adding audio to snapshot, keystone  
correction, color correction, MOTION PRINT,  
Layout Print, movie editing, power down.  
Amber Flashing Flash is charging.  
Memory card is locked. / Cannot create  
folder. / Memory is full. / Write error.  
Lit  
Red  
AF Assist/  
Self-timer Lamp  
Memory card problem. / Memory card is  
Flashing  
Meaning  
unformatted. / Low battery alert.  
Color  
Status  
Red  
Flashing Self-timer countdown.  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
USB Cradle Indicator Lamps  
[CHARGE] Lamp  
USB Lamp  
Meaning  
Charging  
The USB cradle has two indicator lamps: a [CHARGE] lamp and  
a USB lamp. These lamps light and flash to indicate the current  
operational status of the cradle and camera.  
Color  
Red  
Status  
Lit  
Color  
Status  
Green  
Lit  
Charging complete  
Charge standby  
Charge error  
Green Flashing  
Red Flashing  
Green  
Lit  
USB connection  
Green Flashing Memory being accessed.  
[CHARGE] lamp  
USB Lamp  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
 
Troubleshooting Guide  
Finding the Problem and Fixing It  
Problem  
Possible Causes and Action  
Power Supply  
Power does not turn on.  
1) The battery may not be oriented correctly (page 36).  
2) The battery may be dead. Charge the battery (page 36). If the battery goes dead soon after being  
charged, it means the battery has reached the end of its life and needs to be replaced. Purchase a  
separately available CASIO NP-20 rechargeable lithium ion battery.  
Camera suddenly powers  
down.  
1) Auto Power Off may have activated (page 45). Turn power back on.  
2) The battery may be dead. Charge the battery (page 36).  
3) The camera’s protection function may have activated because camera temperature is too high. Turn off  
the camera and wait until it cools down before trying to use it again.  
Power does not turn off.  
Nothing happens when a  
button is pressed.  
Remove the battery from the camera and then reinsert it.  
Image Recording  
Image is not recorded when  
1) If the camera is in the PLAY mode, press [  
] (REC) to enter the REC mode.  
the shutter button is pressed. 2) If the flash is charging, wait until the charge operation finishes.  
3) If the message “Memory Full” appears, transfer images to your computer, delete images you no longer  
need, or use a different memory card.  
Auto Focus does not focus  
properly.  
1) If the lens is dirty, clean it off.  
2) The subject may not be in the center of the focus frame when you compose the image.  
3) The subject you are shooting may not be a type that is not compatible with Auto Focus (page 71). Use  
manual focus (page 129).  
4) You may be moving the camera when shooting. Try shooting with Anti Shake (page 110) or use a tripod.  
5) You may be using Quick Shutter and pressing the shutter button all the way, resulting in poor focus.  
Half-press the shutter button and allow enough time for Auto Focus to focus.  
APPENDIX  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
   
Problem  
Possible Causes and Action  
The subject is out of focus in  
the recorded image.  
The image may not be focused properly. When composing the image, make sure the subject is located  
inside the focus frame.  
The flash does not fire.  
1) If “  
” (Flash Off) is selected as the flash mode, change to another mode (page 75).  
2) If the battery is dead, charge it (page 36).  
3) If a BEST SHOT scene that uses the “  
” (Flash Off) flash mode is selected, change to a different  
flash mode (page 75) or select a different BEST SHOT scene (page 104).  
Camera powers down during The battery may be dead. Charge the battery (page 36).  
self-timer countdown.  
The monitor screen image is  
out of focus.  
1) You may be using Manual Focus and have not focused the image. Focus the image (page 129).  
2) You may be using the macro mode  
for scenery or portraits. Use Auto Focus for scenery and  
portrait shots (page 122).  
3) You may be trying to use Auto Focus or the Infinity mode  
Macro mode for close ups (page 123).  
when shooting a close-up shot. Use the  
There is a vertical line on the Shooting a very brightly lit subject can cause a vertical band to appear in the monitor screen image. This is  
monitor screen.  
a CCD phenomenon known as “vertical smear”, and does not indicate malfunction of the camera. Note that  
vertical smear is not recorded with the image in the case of a snapshot, but it is recorded in the case of a  
movie.  
There is digital noise in  
images.  
1) Sensitivity may have been increased automatically for a dark subject, which increases the chance of  
digital noise. Use a light or some other means to illuminate the subject.  
2) You may be attempting to shoot in a dark location while “  
” (Flash Off) is selected as the flash mode,  
which can increase digital noise and make images appear coarse. In this case, change to a different  
flash mode (page 75) or use lights for illumination.  
3) Flash assist or dynamic range may be enabled for snapshots, which can cause an increase in digital  
noise. Use a light or some other means to illuminate the subject.  
An image I shot was not  
saved.  
1) Camera power may have been turned off before the save operation was complete, which will result in  
the image not being saved. When the battery indicator shows “  
possible (page 36).  
”, charge the battery as soon as  
2) You may have removed the memory card from the camera before the save operation was complete,  
which will result in the image not being saved. Do not remove the memory card before the save  
operation is complete.  
APPENDIX  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
281  
Problem  
Possible Causes and Action  
Though available lighting is  
bright, the faces of people in  
the image are dark.  
Not enough light is reaching the subjects. Change the flash mode setting to “  
synchro flash (page 75), or use adjust EV shift to the + side (page 131).  
” (Flash On) for daylight  
Subjects are too bright when  
shooting images in a  
seashore or ski area.  
Sunlight reflected by water, sand, or snow, can cause underexposure of images. Change the flash mode  
setting to “  
” (Flash On) for daylight synchro flash (page 75), or use adjust EV shift to the + side (page  
Digital zoom does not work.  
1) The digital zoom setting may be turned off. Turn on digital zoom (page 74).  
The zoom bar indicates zoom 2) Time stamping may be turned on, which will cause digital zoom to be disabled. Turn off time stamping  
only up to a zoom factor of  
3.0.  
Recognition of a family  
member’s face is not  
recognized correctly, even  
though the face has been  
recorded.  
Though face characteristics were recorded for your family member, the data may have been faulty, or the  
angle to the face or its expression may be making recognition difficult. Re-record the face of the family  
member who is not being recognized (page 88).  
The image is out of focus  
during movie recording.  
1) Focusing is not possible because the subject is outside the focus range. Shoot within the allowable  
range.  
2) The lens may be dirty. Clean the lens (page 34).  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282  
Problem  
Possible Causes and Action  
Playback  
The color of the playback  
image is different from what  
appears on the monitor  
screen when shooting.  
Sunlight or light from another source may be shining directly into the lens when you are shooting. Position  
the camera so sunlight does not shine directly into the lens.  
Images are not displayed.  
This camera cannot display non-DCF images recorded onto a memory card using another digital camera.  
Note that you cannot edit the following types of imagess.  
I can’t edit images (Layout  
Print, resizing, trimming,  
keystone correction, color  
restoration, rotation, white  
balance, date/time editing).  
Images created with MOTION PRINT  
Movies  
Images recorded with another camera  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
283  
Problem  
Possible Causes and Action  
Other  
The wrong date and time are The date and time setting is off. Set the correct date and time (page 202).  
displayed.  
The messages on the display The wrong display language is selected. Change the display language setting (page 206).  
are in the wrong language.  
I can’t transfer images over a 1) The USB cable may not be connected securely. Check all connections.  
USB connection.  
2) If your computer is running Windows 98SE or 98, the USB driver may not be installed. Install the USB  
driver (page 225), which you can download from the official EXILIM Website at http://www.exilim.com/.  
3) If your computer is running Windows 98SE or 98, the USB driver may be installed incorrectly. Reinstall  
the USB driver correctly (page 225).  
4) The wrong USB communication protocol may be selected. Select the correct USB communication  
protocol in accordance with the type of device you are connecting (page 207).  
5) If the camera is not turned on, turn it on.  
Display language setting  
screen appears when the  
camera is turned on.  
1) You did not configure initial settings after purchasing the camera or the battery may have been left with  
a dead battery. Check the camera setup (pages 11, 206).  
2) The may be a problem with the camera’s built-in memory management area. If this is the case, perform  
the reset operation to initialize the camera’s setup (page 150). After that, configure each setting. If the  
language selection screen does not re-appear when you turn the camera on, it means that the camera’s  
built-in memory management area has been restored.  
If the same message appears after you turn power back on, contact your retailer or a CASIO service  
center.  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
284  
Display Messages  
Card ERROR  
There is something wrong with the memory  
card. Turn off the camera, remove the memory  
card, and then reload it into the camera. If this  
message re-appears when you turn the  
camera back on, format the memory card  
(page 50).  
ALERT  
The camera’s protection function may have  
activated because camera temperature is too  
high. Turn off the camera and wait until it cools  
down before trying to use it again.  
Any of the following may occur after the  
“ALERT” message appears.  
IMPORTANT!  
1) Power turns off.  
2) Movie recording is impossible or movie  
length is limited.  
3) Monitor screen brightness setting changes  
to 0.  
Formatting the memory card deletes all its  
files. Before formatting, try transferring  
recoverable files to a computer or some  
other storage device.  
Check  
connections!  
You are attempting to connect the camera  
to a printer while the camera’s USB settings  
are not compatible with the USB system of  
the printer (page 212).  
If your computer is running Windows 98SE  
or 98, the USB driver may not be installed  
Battery is low.  
Battery power is low.  
Cannot correct  
image!  
Keystone correction of the image cannot be  
performed for some reason. The image will be  
stored as-is, without correction (page 113).  
Cannot find the  
file.  
The image you specified with the slideshow  
“Images” setting cannot be found. Change the  
“Images” setting (page 156) and try again.  
Files could not  
be saved  
because battery  
is low.  
Battery power is low, so an image file could not  
be saved.  
Cannot register  
any more files.  
You are attempting to save a BEST SHOT  
scene when there are already 999 scenes  
in the “SCENE” folder (page 108).  
You are attempting to copy a FAVORITE  
file when the “FAVORITE” folder already  
contains 9999 files (page 192).  
Folder cannot be You are trying to record a file while there are  
created.  
already 9,999 files stored in the 999th folder. If  
you want to record more, delete files you no  
longer need (page 196).  
LENS ERROR  
This message appears and the camera turns  
off whenever lens performs some unexpected  
operation. If the same message appears after  
you turn power back on, contact your retailer  
or a CASIO service center.  
APPENDIX  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
285  
   
Load paper!  
Memory Full  
The printer ran out of paper while printing.  
There are no  
There are currently no files specified for  
printing images. printing. Configure the required DPOF settings  
Set up DPOF.  
Memory is full with images you recorded and/  
or of files saved by editing operations. Delete  
files you no longer need (page 196).  
(page 215).  
There is no  
image to  
register.  
The setup you are trying to save is for an  
image that cannot be saved as a user BEST  
SHOT scene.  
No Favorites file! The FAVORITE folder does not contain any  
files.  
This card is not  
formatted.  
The memory card loaded in the camera is not  
formatted. Format the memory card (page 50).  
Printing Error  
Record Error  
Replenish ink!  
An error occurred while printing.  
The printer is turned off.  
The printer generated an error, etc.  
This file cannot  
be played.  
The file you are trying to access is corrupted or  
is a type that cannot be displayed by this  
camera.  
Image compression could not be performed for  
some reason during image data storage.  
Shoot the image again.  
This function  
You attempted to copy images from built-in  
cannot be used. memory to a memory card while there is no  
During printing, the printer is running low on  
ink or is out of ink.  
memory card loaded in the camera (page  
RETRY POWER If the lens comes into contact with some  
This function is  
not supported  
for this file.  
The function you are trying to use cannot be  
performed for some reason.  
ON  
obstacle, this message appears and the  
camera turns off. Take action to remove the  
obstacle, and try turning on power again.  
SYSTEM ERROR Your camera system is corrupted. Contact  
your retailer or an authorized CASIO service  
center.  
The card is  
locked.  
The LOCK switch of the SD memory card or  
SDHC memory card loaded in the camera is in  
the locked position. You cannot store images  
to or delete images from a memory card that is  
locked.  
There are no  
files.  
There are no files in built-in memory or on the  
memory card.  
APPENDIX  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286  
Storage Capacity  
Specifications  
Snapshots  
Main Specifications  
Approximate  
Built-in Memory  
(10.8 MB)  
ApproximateSD  
Memory Card  
(1 GB)  
Image  
Image  
Size  
Approximate  
Image File  
Size  
Product Type  
Model  
Digital Camera  
EX-S880  
Quality  
(Pixels)  
Capacity  
Capacity  
8M  
(3264 ×  
2448)  
Fine  
Normal  
Economy  
Fine  
4.59 MB  
2.46 MB  
1.67 MB  
4.3 MB  
2 images  
4 images  
6 images  
2 images  
4 images  
6 images  
2 images  
5 images  
7 images  
3 images  
5 images  
8 images  
4 images  
7 images  
210 images  
393 images  
579 images  
224 images  
418 images  
616 images  
259 images  
478 images  
700 images  
277 images  
511 images  
743 images  
386 images  
690 images  
Camera Functions  
Image Files  
Format  
Snapshots:  
JPEG (Exif Version 2.2); DCF (Design Rule for  
Camera File System) 1.0 standard; DPOF  
compliant  
3:2  
(3264 ×  
2176)  
Normal  
Economy  
Fine  
2.31 MB  
1.57 MB  
3.73 MB  
2.02 MB  
1.38 MB  
3.48 MB  
1.89 MB  
1.3 MB  
Movies: H.264/AVC MOV format  
Audio: WAV  
Recording Media Built-in Memory 10.8 MB  
SDHC Memory Card  
16:9  
(3264 ×  
1840)  
SD Memory Card  
MMC (MultiMediaCard)  
MMCplus (MultiMediaCardplus)  
Normal  
Economy  
Fine  
6M  
(2816 ×  
2112)  
Normal  
Economy  
Fine  
4M  
(2304 ×  
1728)  
2.5 MB  
Normal  
Economy  
1.4 MB  
900 KB  
12 images 1074 images  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
287  
     
Movies  
Approximate  
Built-in Memory  
(10.8 MB)  
ApproximateSD  
Memory Card  
(1 GB)  
Image  
Size  
(Pixels)  
Approximate  
Image File  
Size  
Image  
Quality  
Image  
Quality  
(Pixels)  
Approximate  
Built-in Memory  
(10.8 MB) Capacity  
Approximate SD  
Memory Card  
(1 GB) Capacity  
Approximate Data  
Rate (Frame Rate)  
Capacity  
Capacity  
2M  
(1600 ×  
1200)  
Fine  
Normal  
Economy  
Fine  
1.26 MB  
790 KB  
470 KB  
330 KB  
190 KB  
140 KB  
8 images  
767 images  
UHQ  
5.8 Megabits/second 13 seconds  
22 minutes,  
48 seconds  
13 images 1224 images  
23 images 2057 images  
33 images 2930 images  
56 images 5089 images  
76 images 6906 images  
640 × 480 (30 frames/second)  
UHQ Wide 7.0 Megabits/second 10 seconds  
848 × 480 (30 frames/second)  
18 minutes,  
53 seconds  
VGA  
(640 ×  
480)  
HQ  
2.8 Megabits/second 26 seconds  
47 minutes,  
24 seconds  
Normal  
Economy  
640 × 480 (30 frames/second)  
HQ Wide  
3.4 Megabits/second 21 seconds  
38 minutes,  
59 seconds  
848 × 480 (30 frames/second)  
Normal  
1.4 Megabits/second 51 seconds  
94 minutes  
640 × 480 (30 frames/second)  
LP  
545 Kilobits/second 128 seconds  
240 minutes  
320 × 240 (15 frames/second)  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288  
 
*
The number of image values are approximate and are provided  
for reference only. The actual number of images you may be  
able to record may be less than that indicated on the monitor  
screen.  
Image files sizes are approximate and are provided for  
reference only. Actual image file sizes vary depending on  
subject type.  
The above values are based on use of a Matsushita Electric  
Industrial Co., Ltd. PRO HIGH SPEED SD memory card.  
The number of images you can save depends on the type of  
memory card you are using.  
Focusing  
Contrast Detection Auto Focus  
Focus Modes: Auto Focus, Macro Focus, Pan  
Focus, Infinity Mode, Manual Focus  
AF Area: Spot, Multi or Tracking; with AF  
assist lamp  
*
*
Approximate  
Focus Range  
(from lens  
surface)  
Auto Focus: 40 cm to  
(1.3' to  
)
Macro Focus: 15 cm to 50 cm (5.9" to 19.7")  
Infinity:  
Manual Focus: 15 cm to  
(5.9" to  
)
Range is affected by optical zoom.  
*
*
To determine the number of images that can be stored on a  
memory card of a different capacity, multiply the capacities in  
the table by the appropriate value.  
Each movie can be up to 10 minutes long. Movie recording  
stops automatically after 10 minutes of recording.  
Exposure  
Control  
Metering: Multi-pattern, center weighted, and  
spot by imaging element  
Exposure: Program AE  
Exposure Compensation: –2EV to +2EV (in 1/  
3EV steps)  
Shutter  
CCD shutter, mechanical shutter  
Snapshot (Auto): 1/2 to 1/2000 second  
Shutter speed is different for the following  
BEST SHOT scenes.  
Delete  
1 file; all files (with memory protection feature)  
8.1 million  
Night Scene: 4 to 1/2000 second  
Effective Pixels  
Aperture Value  
White Balance  
F2.7/8.0 auto switching  
* F8.0 is the aperture when an ND filter is  
being used.  
Using optical zoom causes the aperture  
value to change.  
Imaging Element 1/2.5 square pixel primary color CCD  
(Total pixels: 8.29 million)  
Lens/Focal  
Distance  
F2.7 to 5.2/f=6.2 to 18.6 mm (Equivalent to 38  
to 114 mm on a 35 mm film camera.)  
Six lenses in five groups, including aspherical  
lens.  
Auto, fixed (6 modes), manual  
Zoom  
3X optical zoom / 4X digital zoom  
(Image Size: 8M (3264 × 2448 pixels))  
(12X total zoom)  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
289  
Sensitivity  
Snapshots (Standard): Auto, ISO 64, ISO 100,  
ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800  
Approximate  
Audio Snapshot: 30 seconds per image  
AudioRecording After Recording: 30 seconds per image  
Snapshots (When “Anti Shake” setting is  
“Auto”): ISO 800 (maximum)  
Times  
Voice Recording: 33 minutes, 43 seconds  
(when using built-in memory)  
Snapshots (When BEST SHOT scene is  
“Anti Shake”): ISO 800 (maximum)  
Snapshots (When BEST SHOT scene is  
“High Sensitivity”): ISO 1600 (maximum)  
Movies: Auto  
Monitor Screen  
Viewfinder  
2.8-inch Wide TFT color LCD  
230,400 (960 × 240) pixels  
Monitor Screen  
Timekeeping  
Functions  
Built-in quartz digital clock  
Date and Time: Recorded with image data,  
Time stamp  
Self-timer  
Trigger Times: 10 seconds, 2 seconds, Triple  
Self-timer  
Auto Calendar: To 2049  
Built-in Flash  
Flash Modes: Auto, Off, On, Soft Flash, Red-  
eye reduction  
World Time  
162 cities in 32 time zones  
Approximate Flash Range:  
Flash Range: Wide Angle Optical Zoom:  
0.15 to 3.9 meters (0.5' to 12.8')  
Telephoto Optical Zoom: 0.4 to 2.0 meters  
(1.3' to 6.6')  
Flash Continuous Shutter  
Wide Angle Optical Zoom: 0.4 to 1.7 meters  
(1.3' to 5.6')  
City name, date, time, summer time  
Input/Output  
Terminals  
Cradle contact  
USB  
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed compatible  
Monaural  
Microphone  
Speaker  
Monaural  
Telephoto Optical Zoom: 0.4 to 0.9 meters  
(1.3' to 3.0')  
* ISO Sensitivity: “Auto”  
* Depends on zoom factor.  
Recording  
Snapshots (with audio); Macro; Self-timer;  
Continuous Shutter; BEST SHOT (scenes  
other than Short Movie, Past Movie, and Voice  
Recording); Face Recognition; movie with  
audio (Movie, Short Movie, Past Movie,  
YouTube); audio (Voice Recording)  
* Audio is monaural.  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290  
*2 Continuous Playback Time  
Power Supply  
Standard temperature (23°C (73°F)), one-image scroll  
approximately every 10 seconds  
Power Requirements  
Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery  
(NP-20) × 1  
*3 Approximate continuous recording time  
Approximate Battery Life  
The above values are based a new battery, starting from a  
full charge. Repeated charging shortens battery life.  
Frequency of flash, zoom, and Auto Focus usage, and the  
time the camera is on greatly affects recording time and  
number of shots values.  
All of the values provided below represent the approximate  
amount of time under normal temperature (23°C (73°F)) before  
the camera turns off. These values are not guaranteed. Low  
temperatures shorten battery life.  
Number of Shots (CIPA)*1  
220 shots  
Continuous Playback (Snapshots)*2  
Continuous Movie Recording  
Continuous Voice Recording*3  
240 minutes  
90 minutes  
310 minutes  
Battery: NP-20 (Rated Capacity: 700 mAh)  
Recording Medium: SD memory card 1 GB (The above  
values are based on use of a Matsushita Electric Industrial  
Co., Ltd. PRO HIGH SPEED SD memory card.)  
Measurement Conditions  
*1 Number of Shots (CIPA)  
In accordance with CIPA standards  
Normal temperature (23°C (73°F)), monitor on, zoom  
operation between full wide and full telephoto every 30  
seconds, during which two images are shot with flash; power  
turned off and back on every time 10 images are shot.  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
291  
 
USB Cradle (CA-37)  
Power  
Consumption  
3.7 V DC; Approximately 4.3 W  
Input/Output  
Terminals  
Camera contact; USB port; external power  
supply terminal (DC IN 5.3 V); AV terminal  
(AV OUT: NTSC/PAL standards)  
Dimensions  
94.5 (W) × 60.4 (H) × 17.3 (D) mm (3.7"(W)  
× 2.4"(H) × 0.7"(D)) (Excluding projections;  
13.7 mm (0.5") at thinnest point)  
Power  
5.3 V DC, Approximately 3.2 W  
Weight  
Approximately 128 g (4.5 oz) (excluding  
battery and bundled accessories)  
Consumption  
Dimensions  
109 (W) × 24 (H) × 58 (D) mm  
(4.3"(W) × 0.9"(H) × 2.3"(D))  
(Excluding projections)  
Bundled  
Accessories  
Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery (NP-20);  
USB Cradle (CA-37); Special AC Adaptor  
(AD-C52G)/AC Power Cord; USB Cable; AV  
Cable; Strap; CD-ROMs (2); Basic  
Reference  
Weight  
Approximately 47 g (1.7 oz)  
Special AC Adaptor (Inlet Type) (AD-C52G)  
Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery (NP-20)  
Input Power  
Output Power  
Dimensions  
100 to 240 V AC 50/60Hz 83 mA  
Rated Voltage  
3.7 V  
5.3 V DC 650 mA  
Rated  
700 mAh  
50 (W) × 20 (H) × 70 (D) mm  
(2.0"(W) × 0.8"(H) × 2.8"(D))  
(Excluding projections and cable)  
Capacitance  
Operating  
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)  
Temperature  
Weight  
Approximately 90 g (3.2 oz)  
Dimensions  
Weight  
33.0(W) × 50.0(H) × 4.7(D) mm  
(1.3"(W) × 2.0"(H) × 0.19"(D))  
Power cord precautions for use in Singapore  
The power cord set is not supplied. The power cord used  
must comply with relevant national and/or international  
standards.  
Approximately 16 g (0.56 oz)  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292  
CASIO COMPUTER CO.,LTD.  
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome  
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan  
M10  
MA0710-C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Decker Cordless Saw 90504595 User Manual
Blue Microphones Headphones TIKI User Manual
Bolens Tiller 12156 User Manual
BOXLIGHT Projector MP 350m User Manual
Bradford White Corp Water Heater 25X 78B 3N User Manual
Braun Hair Dryer HD510 HD 530 User Manual
Broil King Convection Oven POV 003 User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Air Compressor FP2004 User Manual
Casio Clock MO1106 EA User Manual
Cisco Systems IP Phone OL 18613 01 User Manual